Home

VI400 Vibration Monitor User Manual

1. EdB dE o a 10 40 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 50 ie 30 30 Coes 013 0 25 0 50 40 20 40 80 i60 32 64 128 256 512 Hz Sago 2002 S719 aL o 2 gt 03 6 8 11 9 18 0 24 1 30 8 41 8 58 6 7 7dB The characteristics of the Wd digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode The Wc filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body during the seat back measurements It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB dB g 0 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 70 70 80 80 50 30 O06 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 Hz meee E E E 0 0 0 2 0 2 1 0 o SRE Aane 25 7 46 6 iE The characteristics of the Wc digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode VI 400Pro USER MANUAL The Wj filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal under the head of the recumbent person It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB 60 70 50 30 O06 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 16 0 32 64 128 254 512 Hz S4505 S26 0 9136 S74 ere era 40 o 2 o 2 0 0 0 7 5 7 16 5 28 5dB The characteristics of the Wj digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode The digital
2. BUF STEP position the step or amount of time which the measurement results are saved in an instrument s buffer available values 2ms 1h gt CHANNELS SETUP sub list CHANNEL x sub list e MODE x position available mode used in the channel during the measurements o VIBR for vibration measurements and o SOUND for sound measurements e RANGE position available range measurements the user can select the range o 17 8m s or 316m s for vibration measurements and o 105dB or 130dB for sound analysis e FILTER position available digital weighting filter used in the channel during the measurements o HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VeIMF Dil1 Dil3 Dil10 W Bxy W Bz H A W Bc KB Wk Wd Wc Wj for vibration measurements and o LIN A C for sound measurements e DETECT position available detector time constant used in the channel o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s for vibration measurements and o IMP FAST SLOW for sound measurements gt BUFFERS SETUP sub list available channel measurement results which will be saved in the instrument s buffer VI 400PRO USER MANUAL o None PEAK P P MAX RMS for vibration measurements and o None PEAK MAX MIN RMS for sound measurements o VECTOR available value of VECTOR which will be saved in the instrument s buffer gt 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP or 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP sub list CHANNEL x o SPECTRUM sub list
3. VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in TRIGGER SETUP window the selection of the signal used for triggering purposes in BUFFER mode A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted abd therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer and the SLM VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 4 2 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer of vibration signal In order to select the instrument s vibration mode the user has to enter the CHANNELS SETUP list by pressing lt MENU gt selecting the INPUT text using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing the lt ENTER gt and then enter the CHANNELS SETUP by chose the number of the CHANNEL to configure In the MODE sub list the user can select the kind of input signal which has to be measured or analysed by the instrument In the case of vibartion signals the VIBRATION METER option should be selected by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt to change to VIBR mode and press lt ENTER gt which accepts the change and closes the MODE sub list The MODE sub list is closed ignoring any changes made after pressing lt E
4. i The view of the displays with the SAVE SETUP position opened The name of the setup file in which the configuration of meter is saved is displayed under the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text The default name for a setup file is displayed when this position is first entered after power on and the last saved setup file s name is displayed when this position is next entered It is possible to edit this name in two ways full and simplified The window of the full editing of the setup file s name the FILE NAME is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the SAVE function was selected for saving measurement results The user can skip the full edition of the setup file s name pressing once more the lt ENTER gt push button This will result in the passing to the phase of the setup file s saving description just after the FILE NAME window FILE HAME 16MAYeH SH2 DEL SHe INS SH2 DEL SH IHS FILE HAME EBMAYS The view of the displays during the process of setting the character in the edited name One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using lt 4 gt lt gt The available ASCII characters can be changed using lt gt lt gt The subsequent upper case letters digits space and underline appear on the display in the highlighted position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons The empty space is created for the introduction of a new character in the edited
5. I IMPULSE according to IEC 651 Type 1 Primary indicator range IEC 651 from 24 dB to 137 dB with A weighting Linearity range IEC 804 from 24 dB to 137 dB with A weighting Pulse range IEC 804 from 24 dB to 140 dB with A weighting Reference conditions e Type of the acoustic field free e Reference acoustic pressure 114 0 dB related to 20 Pa e Reference frequency 1000 Hz e Reference temperature 20 C e Reference relative humidity 65 e Reference static pressure 1013 hPa e Reference incidence direction perpendicular to the microphone diaphragm Calibration Acoustical with the QC 20 acoustic calibrator or equivalent Calibration level 114 0 dB Warm up time 1 min for 0 1 dB accuracy Effect of humidity lt 0 5 dB for 30 lt RH lt 90 at 40 C amp 1000 Hz Effect of magnetic filed lt 15 dB A or lt 25 dB LIN for 80 A m and 50 Hz Effect of temperature lt 0 5 dB from 10 C to 50 C Operating range from 10 C to 50 C Storage from 20 C to 60 C 2 Effect of Vibration lt 71 dB from 20 Hz to 1000 Hz at 1 m s Additional functions Overload indication Underrange indication Battery state indication Vl 400Pro User Manual C 2 SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro AS 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE AND FFT SOUND ANALYZER The VI 400Pro instrument as 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE sound analyzer conforms to the international standards IEC 651
6. lt gt and press lt ENTER gt VI 400PRO USER MANUA The view of the display in the CHANNELx SETUP list in sound measurements path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x the MIC CORRECTION text highlighted In the MICROPHONE CORRECTION position two options are available DIFFUSE FIELD for sound measurement performed in the diffuse field conditions and OUTDOOR for sound measurement performed outdoors The B amp K4936 microphone part number 59 523 supplied with the VI 400PRO instrument is designed for sound measurement performed in the free field condition In order to make the measurements in the diffuse field conditions the user has to switch on an additional correcting filter The frequency characteristic of this filter is given in App D For the measurements performed with the use of the microphones for the diffuse field conditions the option DIFFUSE should be used In order to select the filter the user has to place the special character next to the chosen position by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt available values are V or The position of the sub list can be changed by pressing lt gt lt 7 gt The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the CHANNEL x sub list after pressing lt ENTER gt confirming changes made in the positions or lt ESC gt ignoring changes made in the positions 94h CH1 MIC CORREC DIFFUSE Fa OUTDOOR The displays in the MIC CORRECTION position of the CHANNEL
7. Memory merging position of FILE list Removing all files from instrument s memory position of FILE list Removing a file with the results from instrument s memory position of FILE list Selection of the RMS detector position of CHANNEL x sub list Type of input output devices sub list of EXT I O SETUP Type of input output devices sub list of EXT I O SETUP Setting the reference level for displacement measurements position of REFERENCE LEVEL sub list 4 39 4 58 5 2 5 27 5 23 5 42 5 33 5 14 5 12 5 14 DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY DOSE DYNAMIC EXPOSURE TIME EXT I O SETUP FIELD CORRECTION FILE NAME FILE FILTER FILTER FILTER FREE SPACE FUNCTION HAV CALCULATOR HAV WBV DOSE INPUT INT TIME LEVEL METER LEVEL LOAD SETUP LOAD Selection of the ways of measurement results presentation sub list of DISPLAY list Selection of the scale in graphical results presentations sub list of DISPLAY list Data available on the screen main list function of the push button Selection of DOSE measurements position of FUNCTION sub list Scaling of the vertical axis of the graphical presentation position of DISPLAY SCALE sub list Setting the exposure time position of HAV WBV DOSE list Selecting the external devices sub list of SETUP list Setting the conditions for the diffuse field measurements position of SETUP list Edition of the file name in which the measurement results has to
8. The return to the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt The view of the display in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list the DAILY RESULTS text highlighted 9 04 DAILY Er POSURE EE PE DAILY DOE 456 mis The view of the display with the DAILY EXPOSURE and DAILY DOSE results for selecting file VI 4OOP ro User Manual APPENDIX C DATA SPECIFICATIONS C 1 SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro AS SOUND LEVEL METER ANALYZER The VI 400Pro instrument working as the SLM meets requirements of the IEC 651 IEC 804 and IEC 61672 1 for the Type 1 instruments System configuration VI 400Pro 59 523 BK4936 12 Class 1 microphone 072 028 Microphone Pre Amplifier for connecting 59 523 microphone to 4 input channel QC 20 Acoustic calibrator or equivalent Measuring ranges for the LEQ values RANGE Measurement range with the error lt 0 7 dB LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and microphone sensitivity 50 mV Pa 105 dB from 24 dB A weighting to 115 dB A weighting 105 dB from 24 dB C weighting to 115 dB C weighting 105 dB from 30 dB LIN weighting to 115 dB LIN weighting 130 dB from 44 dB A weighting to 137 dB A weighting 130 dB from 42 dB C weighting to 137 dB C weighting 130 dB from 46 dB LIN weighting to 137 dB LIN weighting Measuring range for the PEAK value Measurement rang
9. V1 400 0 Real Time Vibration Analyzer Owner s Manual att QUEST The System Solution TECHNOLOGIES VI 400PRO Real Time Vibration Analyzer PRELIMINARY OWNER S MANUAL 072 021 Rev A 11 01 2005 CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION Main features of the VI 400PRO 2 MANUAL CONTROL OF THE INSTRUMENT 2 1 CONTROL PUSH BUTTONS ON THE FRONT PANEL 2 2 INPUT AND OUTPUT SOCKETS OF THE INSTRUMENT 3 SETTING UP THE INSTRUMENT 3 1 BASIS OF THE INSTRUMENT S CONTROL 3 2 POWERING THE INSTRUMENT 3 2 INITIAL SETUP OF THE INSTRUMENT 4 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT 4 1 CALIBRATION 4 1 1 The calibration by the sensitivity introduction Calibration BY SENSITIVITY in the case of vibration signal Calibration BY SENSITIVITY in the case of acoustic signal 4 1 2 The calibration by the measurement Calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of vibration signal Calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of acoustic signal 4 2 LEVEL METER 4 2 1 Sound level meter One profile mode of measurement results presentation 3 PROFILES mode of measurement results presentation Presentation of the statistical analysis results STATISTICS Presentation of time history PLOT 4 2 2 Vibration level meter One profile mode of measurement results presentation 3 PROFILES mode of the measurement results presentation Presentation of time history PLOT 4 2 3 Measurement parameters setting Measurement parameters setting INPUT li
10. gt and press lt ENTER gt 9 50 SAVE OPTIOHMS LOAD DELETE The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the DELETE ALL text highlighted The instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this position after pressing lt ENTER gt The next pressing of lt ENTER gt when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the position and the return to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using lt lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt Are Are you Sure YESI you Sure HO The view of the displays during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation After pressing lt ENTER gt the instrument checks its current state When measurements are being performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message with the changing case letters is displayed see below and the instrument returns after few seconds to the list from which the DELETE ALL position was called MEASUREMENT Measurement IH FROGRESS in Progress The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible VI 400PRO USER MANUA Pressing lt ENTER gt when the YES option is selected and the instrument is not performing measurements deletes all existing files In this case the following text is displayed see below Fig a where 35 denotes the number of bloc
11. Definitions of the results available in the SLM mode of the VI 400Pro D 1 2 Definitions of the Hand Arm vibration results available in the vibration mode of the VI 400 Pro D 1 3 Definitions of the Whole Body vibration results available in the vibration mode of the VI 400Pro D 1 4 Definitions of the results available in the sound mode of the VI 400Pro D 2 CHARACTERISTICS OF DIGITAL FILTERS IMPLEMENTED IN VI 400Pro VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 1 INTRODUCTION The VI 400PRO is an all digital four channel Type 1 vibration meter and analyzer with optional Class 1 sound analysis It is an ideal choice for machine hand arm or whole body vibration measurement using channels 1 2 and 3 with appropriate accelerometer s and sound measurement using channel 4 with a microphone and preamp Large 32 MB internal memory of the VI 400PRO can store time history for all channels over the whole working day Measurement results are easily downloaded to any PC using the USB 1 1 interface and QuestSuite Professional II software QuestSuite Professional Il software can also be used to store user setup profiles and program them into the VI 400PRO The VI 400PRO using the computational power of its built in digital signal processor can perform real time 1 1 or 1 3 octave and optional real time FFT analysis Robust lightweight construction allow the VI 400PRO to be used in harsh environmental conditions The main features of VI 400PRO instrument are as foll
12. HO RECS FREE 15M Led 1319 BATTERY 5 194 1E COHTRAST 1324 CC SUAHTEE SVAH S45 12812 Jer z2 ar Control diagram of the DISPLAY menus VI 400PRO USER MANUAL FILE from main list gt SAVE name of the file or SAVE NEXT name of the file In SAVE the name of the file can be fully edited in the FILE NAME window after pressing lt ENTER gt In SAVE NEXT the FILE NAME can be edited in the simplify way by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt together with lt gt the No results text is displayed when the instrument has not perform any measurement to save gt SAVE OPTIONS sub list RAM FILE position enables the user to save the measurement results in the special file at RAM memory the name of the file is defined as a RAMfile this option is useful when remote reading is necessary e g during the long term monitoring the results are saved all the time in the same space of the units memory available choices V or REPLACE position enables the user to replace the existing files in the instrument s memory with the files having the same name available choices V or SAVE STAT position enables the user to save or not to save the calculated statistics along with the measurement results available choices V or position available only in the SLM in VLM this position does not appear AUTO SAVE position enables the user to save the measurement results in the i
13. In order to display the spectra registered in the buffer s file the user has to press lt gt for the spectra stored later press lt 4 gt for the spectra saved earlier 4 61 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In the BUFFER VIEW sub list it is also possible to examine the time history for 1 3 OCTAVE filter selected by the cursor see the description of the BUFFER VIEW sub list in Chapter 5 A Notice Many time histories can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument during the measurements performed in different sessions The presentation of these results is possible using the BUFFER VIEW window of the DISPLAY list see Chapt 5 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be performed taking into account the USER FILTERS coefficients set in the SETUP list see Chapter 5 for detailed description of the USER FILTERS setting ID I2 E VIER FILTERS EDIT CLEAR The view of the displays in the coefficient values setting of 1 3 or 1 1 OCTAVE filters in the USER FILTERS sub list of the SETUP list When these filters are switched on 1 3 OCTAVE analysis is performed in the normal way but simultaneously the USER FILTERS coefficients are taken into account for the calculation of the TOTAL result The TOTAL results for the first the second or for both USER FILTERS are presented instead of the TOTAL for A C and LIN weighting filters The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the switched on USER FILTERS for CHANNEL x
14. MODE MODE FUHCT TRIGGER PULSE CHAHHEL FUHCT Tor EXT TRIGGER The displays in the EXT I O SETUP position the selection different I O devices e ANALOG in this mode the meter can give signals to the output device For example the signal can be observed on the oscilloscope from the selected CHANNEL The user may choose CHANNEL 1 2 3 or 4 The channel position enables the user to set the external channel In order to enter this position the user has to select the CHANNEL text in the EXT I O SETUP list using lt gt lt V gt After selection of the CHANNEL the user has to press lt 4 gt lt gt gt The position is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ENTER gt confirming changes made in the position or lt ESC gt ignoring changes made in the position 14 42 EXT I 70 SETUP 14 4 ExT I 0 SETUP MODE AHALOG MODE AHALOG CHAHHEL ed CHAHHEL ie The displays in the EXT I O SETUP position the channel selection for output signal VI 400PRO USER MANUAL e DIGITAL IN in this mode the meter is connected to the output device which triggers it to undertake measurements It starts to measure when it s input has a triggering impulse In this mode the instrument works in EXT TRIGGER function e DIGITAL OUT in this mode the meter is connected to output device which is triggered by the VI 400Pro to measure The VI 400Pro sends a digital trigger pulse to another device In t
15. Measurement calibration of an accelerometer can be performed using a handheld vibration calibrator shaker such as our model 072 018 Measurement calibration of a microphone can be performed using an acoustical calibrator such as our model QC 20 12 4 12 4 BY SEMSITIMITY ey MER SUREMERMT a b The view of the displays in the CALIBRATION sub list path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION CHANNEL X with BY SENSITIVITY selected a and BY MEASUREMENT selected b A Note The calibration level and the calibration result is expressed in different units depending on the settings of the instrument The metric or non metric vibration units are set in the VIBRATION UNITS window of the SETUP list Additionally the linear or logarithmic units are set in the DISPLAY SCALE sub list of the DISPLAY list VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 1 1 Calibration by sensitivity Calibration BY SENSITIVITY for vibration signal The calibration BY SENSITIVITY for an accelerometer can be conducted in the following way 1 Select BY SENSITIVITY from the CALIBRATION sub list and press lt ENTER gt 12 4 SEMSITIWITY A Bde The view of the displays with the selected calibration mode and after pressing lt ENTER gt 2 Input the sensitivity of the accelerometer taken from its calibration card using lt 4 gt lt gt gt and then press lt ENTER gt The calibration factor is calculated after pressing lt ENTER gt in the relati
16. The view of the displays with the settings influencing the TOTAL values presented in the SPECTRUM mode The results of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis so called spectrum can be presented as the acceleration velocity or displacement spectrum The type of the spectrum is selected in the SPECTRUM TYPE window of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM TYPE ACCELERATION VELOCITY or DISPLACEMENT le l DISPLAY SCALE TOTAL WALUES SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM Tyre RILCELERAI LUM ELL ITE The view of the displays with the settings influencing 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results presentation in the SPECTRUM mode The results of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis are always calculated and saved as the acceleration spectrum The ACC text given in the first left column indicates that the acceleration spectrum is presented on the display In order to present the velocity spectrum the linear accelerometer value from each 1 3 OCTAVE filter is divided by 2zf where f is the exact central frequency of the mentioned filter The VEL text is presented in the first column of the display in this case indicating the type of the spectrum In order to present the displacement spectrum the linear velocity value from each 1 3 OCTAVE filter is divided by 27f where f is the exact central frequency of the mentioned filter The DIL text is given in the first column of the display in this case indicating the type of the spectrum 4 70
17. VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration velocity and displacement spectrum expressed in LINear path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LIN METRIC units path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS METRIC for CHANNEL 1 The read out of the desried spectrum value can be done by means of the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt lt gt On the right side of the display the selected 1 3 octave filter center frequency or the selected TOTAL is given the current time of registered spectrum the numerical value corresponding to the position of the cursor and the units are displayed in the consecutive lines A Note The displayed units during the measurement or analysis of vibration signal depends on the different settings made in the VIBRATION UNITS METRIC or NON METRIC the VIBR SCALE position of DISPLAY SCALE LIN or LOG and the weighting FILTER set in CHANNELS x for acceleration velocity or displacement measurements 13 49 l2 22 l2 22 TEGRATIONt HCE LEWELSPUIBRATION UNITS FPVIBRATIOM UNITS UME E The displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration velocity and displacement spectrum expressed in LINear path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LIN METRIC units path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS METRIC The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration velocity and displacement spectrum expr
18. Y gt Each press of the lt gt with lt gt results in 10 dB shift down of the presentation and each press of the lt gt with lt Y gt results in a 10 dB shift up The view of the displays in the PLOT presentation mode with the shifted axes METRIC units and LINEAR scale setting selected A Notice Many time histories can be stored registered in the buffer during measurements The user can select for display the desired time history in the BUFFER VIEW window available in the DISPLAY list see Chapter 5 for details VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 2 3 Measurement parameters setting The important parameters for the measurement are programmed by means of the INPUT and SETUP lists Measurement parameters setting INPUT Setting of the channels parameters can be done by means of the INPUT list after pressing lt MENUs gt selecting INPUT by means of lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The INPUT list contains four elements which allow for the independent programming of e the measurement parameters MEASURE SETUP e the parameters of four channels CHANNELS SETUP e the buffers settings BUFFERS SETUP e the trigger function TRIGGER SETUP e the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP or FFT SETUP function for 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis respectively 13 28 FUMCT IO BUFFERS SETUP FILE 1 1 OCTAVE SETU 13 29 BUFFERS SETUP BUFFERS SETUP d 17
19. a 0 02 CAL LEWEL CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL 146 dE 11 2 mse 11 2 mise CAL MEASURE CAL MEASURE cal Measure RMS RMS Sf2mmise RMS 182mmfse The displays during the calibration measurements B IB CAL LELEL 188mm ise CAL RESULT RMS E mise The displays after the calibration measurements VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The calibration procedure should be repeated a few times to ensure the integrity of the calibration The results obtained should be almost identical with 0 1 dB Possible reasons for unstable results are as follows e the calibrator is not properly attached to the instrument e there are external disturbances e the calibrator or the measurement channel the accelerometer or the instrument itself are damaged A Note During the calibration period external disturbances vibrations or acoustic noise should not exceed 100 aB 5 Press lt ENTER gt to accept the measurement result After pressing lt ENTER gt the calibration factor is calculated stored and displayed cf Fig below Be CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL OF z OF 3 dE C 42 806 The displays after pressing lt ENTER gt after calculation of the calibration factor value A Note The calibration factor is always added to the measurement results in the level meter mode and coming from the frequency analysis 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT Calibration BY MEASUREMENT for acoustic signal The calibration for sound
20. gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the LOAD SETUP text highlighted A Notice It is not possible to load the file during the execution of the measurements On such attempt the message measurement in progress MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS is displayed for about 2 seconds After pressing lt ENTER gt the instrument checks its current state When measurements are performed the file loading is not possible In such case the message with the changing case letters is displayed see below and the instrument returns after few seconds to the list from which the LOAD position was called MERSUREMEMT Measurement IH FROGRESS iff Progress The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible When the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the LOAD SETUP position the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction from the user The user should then press lt ESC gt lt ENTER gt or lt START STOP gt 13 44 16 35 HO FILES LOAD 171 i6 JUN 15 03 16 The view of the displays during the execution of the LOAD SETUP operation The current number of the file and the total number of the saved files is displayed in the first line The name of the file is highlighted in the second line
21. lt gt lt Y gt The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP sub list after pressing lt ENTER gt confirming of all settings made in the sub list or lt ESC gt ignoring all settings made in the sub list 5 35 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 5 3 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS The registration of the measurement results is an essential task for the efficient use of the instrument All available measurement results can be stored in the FLASH memory of the instrument There are two main ways for storing the measurement data in the instrument 1 Saving files in the FLASH DISC using the FILE list 2 Logging data in the files of the buffer A Notice The instrument s buffer memory is independent from the FLASH DISC memory The capacity of available memory is equal to 32 MB Saving files In the case of the VI 400PRO instrument there are six different types of files containing data e from Sound Level Meter mode e from Vibration Level Meter mode e from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis e from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e stored in the instrument s buffer A Notice The files in the buffer are created automatically the use of the SAVE position is not required Each file consists of some elements which are the same for all kind of files e a file header e the unit and software specification e the user s text stored together with the measurement data e the parameters and global settings e the special sett
22. lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL BH FUNCT IOM MEASURE SETUP CHAHHEL 3 OY CHAHHEL 4 FILE OYFFT SETUP The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected It is possible to change RANGE in SOUND mode In this case the instrument operates in two input ranges 105dB or 130dB which can be selected by means of the range position In order to change the mode of the range the user has to press lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the CHANNEL x sub list is made ignoring the changes after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt g g MODEL Sa SOUND MODEC Sa SOUND RAHGE RAHGE ILTER FILTER DETECT FAST DETECT FAST The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected for SOUND signal A Notice It is not possible to change the range of the measurements during the execution of measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished The view of the displays with RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE not accessible A Notice If an OVERL
23. results expressed in METRIC b and NON METRIC units c The results of the measurements can be presented in One profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS and PLOT display modes It is possible to change the display mode pressing the lt gt or lt gt push buttons together with lt gt In 3 PROFILES display mode the results of the measurement from three channels are displayed simultaneously The units weighted filter and detector time constant are also shown The factory default settings of the channels are as follows CHANNEL 1 VIBR mode 316 m s range HP1 weighting filter FILTER HP1 1 0 s RMS detector DETECT 1 0s CHANNEL 2 VIBR mode 316 m s range HP3 weighting filter FILTER HP3 1 0 s RMS detector DETECT 1 0s CHANNEL 3 VIBR mode 316 m s range HP10 weighting filter FILTER HP10 1 0 s RMS detector DETECT 1 0s VI 400PRO USER MANUAL CHANNEL 4 SOUND mode 130 dB range A weighting filter FILTER A FAST type of the RMS detector DETECTOR FAST The user can change all settings mentioned above using CHANNEL x sub list of the INPUT list The instrument will remember all changes It is possible to return to factory default settings in the CLEAR SETUP position available in the SETUP list In addition to sound level meter SLM or vibration level meter VLM modes the VI 400Pro can also be used as a 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analyzer In SLM or VLM operating mode of the unit the one pr
24. the SLM case does not depend on the detector time constant the results are displayed without the indicator of the detectors selected in the profiles 10 58 10 58 RMS eS sen RMS IHTEGFATIOH PLINER jj LAL The view of the displays with the available options of the RMS INTEGRATION position Setting EXPONENTIAL enables the user to fulfil the requirements of the IEC 804 standard for the LEQ measurements When this option is selected for sound measurements the value of the LEQ and SEL function the SLM case depend on the detector time constant the results are displayed with the indicator of the detectors selected in the profiles VI 400PRO USER MANUA For sound measurements setting EXPONENTIAL enables the user to fulfil the requirements of the IEC 804 standard for the RMS measurements When this option is selected the value of the function depends on the detector time constant the results are displayed with the indicator of the detectors selected in the profiles Setting the reference signal in vibration measurements REFERENCE LEVEL The REFERENCE LEVEL path MENU SETUP REFERENCE LEVEL sub list enables the user to set the reference level of the signal in vibration or sound measurements The values which are set here are taken into account during the calculations of the measurement results expressed in the logarithmic scale with the dB as the units In order to enter this position the user has to select the REFERENCE LEVEL
25. 14 52 E HAME FIL FIL 1 JUNE A 1 JUNE EsP EsP OSURE TIME OSURE TIME The view of the displays during the execution of the setting the EXPOSURE TIME operation The EXPOSURE TIME position defines the time during which measurement results are extrapolated The required parameter can be set using lt 4 gt lt gt and confirmed by lt ENTER gt The integration time EXPOSURE TIME can be set from 00h00m to 24h00m with 1m step by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt or with 30m step by pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user can set the EXPOSURE TIME for each file separately VI 400PRO USER MANUA Selection of the partial results PARTIAL EAV ELV The PARTIAL EAV ELV position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR PARTIAL EAV ELV is used to display partial results for each file separately The results are displayed in two columns the first column for EAV results and the second for ELV results The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the PARTIAL EAV ELV text in the HAV CALCULATOR sub list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the HAV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt 12 44 RESULTS SEL cs DAILY EXPOSURE The view of the display in the HAV CALCULATOR sub list the PARTIAL EAV ELV text highlighted 5 22 5 22 EAL ELL BAr46 63 155 JUNG Gi i4 HETY g 00 46 03
26. 184 a c The view of the display with the empty partial result list a the selecting file in RESULT SEL sub list b and the PARTIAL EAV ELYV results for selecting file b c The user can review the RESULTS SEL sub list and PARTIAL EAV ELV list using lt gt lt 7 gt The return to the HAV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt 93 55 4 05 4 05 EAL EL EAL EL BE 36 Bz l 4fjjd Geid2 BzZ l t p 36 Bz l 4jj5 i i 6 66 36 be 144 The view of the display with the selected file in RESULT SEL sub list and the PARTIAL EAV ELV results for select file Selection of the partial exposure PARTIAL EXP The PARTIAL EXP position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR PARTIAL EXP is used to display EXPOSURE results for each selected file separately The results are displayed in one column there are six positions for each file separately The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the PARTIAL EXP Text in the HAV CALCULATOR sub list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the HAV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt The view of the display in the HAV CALCULATOR sub list the PARTIAL EXP text highlighted VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The user can review the EXPOSURE list and EAV ELV list using lt gt lt Y gt The return to the HAV CALCULATO
27. 3 channel this position is not displayed available values from 60 0dB to 60 0dB with 0 1dB or 1 dB step e SPECTRUM TYPE position available values of this position gt ACCELERATION VELOCITY and DISPLACEMENT for vibration measurements and gt LEQ RMS for sound measurements BUFFER VIEW sub list NO position shows available number of the files in the instrument s buffer containing measurement results RECS position shows number of records contained in the selected file with measurement results FREE position shows the size of the available memory in the instrument s buffer BATTERY window shows the state of the internal battery CONTRAST position enables the user to select the contrast of the instrument s display BACKLIGHT sub list TIMEOUT position available values V or if V is selected once the backlight is turned on it will automatically turn itself off 30 seconds after the last push button has been pressed BRIGHTNESS position enables the user to select brightness of the instrument s backlight UNIT LABEL window informs the user about the serial number of the unit the internal software version the internal memory size and the standards which the instrument fulfils VI 400PRO USER MANUAL BUFFER LIEW BATTERY 12 54 DISPLAY MODES al SPECTRUM TYPE LAY SCALE ET L VALUES DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM TOTAL 3 1304 BUF VIEW BUF EMPTY FREE 15744r BUF WIE
28. FILE position is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt This option is useful when remote reading is necessary available values V or E SAWE STAT AUTO SALE RAM FIL REPLACE FILE parameters Replacement of the existing files by the new ones REPLACE The result of an attempt to save a file with a name which already exists in the memory depends on the setting of the REPLACE position It is possible to erase the old file and to save the new one with the same name if the position is active V The message is displayed that such operation is not available when this position is not active see the description of the SAVE position The activation or deactivation of the REPLACE position is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt SAWE STAT AUTO SAVE AUTO SAVE The displays during the execution of the SAVE OPTIONS the selection of the REPLACE parameters VI 400PRO USER MANUAL After pressing lt ENTER gt the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular the REPLACE position are confirmed and the sub list is closed When the AUTO SAVE option is active V after pressing lt ENTER gt the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for AUTO SAVE files The next position from the SAVE OPTIONS sub list becomes available after pressing lt 7 gt The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing lt ESC gt Controlling of the measurement stati
29. FUNCTIONS list the user has to e press lt MENU gt e select highlight the AUX FUNCTIONS text from the main list using lt gt lt gt or lt 1 gt lt gt e press lt ENTER gt Pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing lt Altf gt and lt 7 gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list The view of the display in the main list the AUX FUNCTIONS text highlighted The AUX FUNCTIONS list is used to calculate the various parameters which are mainly dedicated for the control of the VIBRATION In the internal firmware version 2 17 this sub list contains only one position HAV WBV CALC The HAV WBV CALCULATOR path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR or WBV CALCULATOR position is used to calculate the characteristics parameters for these measurements It enables the VI 400Pro to calculate the HAV and WBV value PARTIAL EXPOSURE and DAILY EXPOSURE The following items are presented on the HAV WBV CALC list HAV CALCULATOR enables the VI 400Pro to calculate the various H A parameters WBV CALCULATOR enables the VI 400Pro to calculate the various WB parameters In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or lis
30. HAV CALCULATOR sub list Displaying the partial exposure results sub list of HAV CALCULATOR sub list Displaying the partial results in DOSE mode sub list of HAV CALCULATOR Measurement results presentation mode graphical position of DISPLAY MODES sub list Saving the results of the measurements in the special file at RAM memory position of the SAVE OPTIONS list Selection of the measurement range in SLM and VLM position of INPUT list Selection of the measurement range in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis position of INPUT list Selection of the measurement range in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis position of INPUT list 4 66 5 50 2 2 5 58 5 32 4 22 4 23 5 53 5 43 4 9 4 22 4 23 5 32 5 61 5 65 5 61 5 2 REFERENCE LEVEL Setting the reference level for vibration measurements sub list of SETUP list 5 27 REP CYCLE Setting number of repetition of measurement cycles position of MEASURE SETUP sub list 4 24 REPLACE Replacement of the existing files by the new ones position of SAVE OPTIONS sub list 5 41 RESULT SEL Selection the files with H A data sub list of HAV CALCULATOR sub list 5 59 RESULT SEL Selection the files with WBV data sub list of WBV CALCULATOR sub list 5 62 RMS INTEGRATION _ Selection of detector s type in the LEQ calculations position of SETUP list 5 26 RTC Programming of the instrument s internal Real Time Clock position of RTC 5 16 SAVE NEXT Saving files in the memory with the name s modification position of FILE l
31. IEC 61672 1 and IEC 804 for type 1 sound level meters and the IEC 1260 standard for the pass band filters Configuration of the system e VI 400Pro 59 523 BK4936 1 2 Class 1 Pre Polarized Microphone 072 028 Microphone Pre Amplifer for connecting 59 523 microphone to 4 input QC 20 acoustic calibrator or equivalent Measuring ranges Two measuring ranges 105 dB and 130 dB Measurement range with the error lt 0 7 dB LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and microphone sensitivity 50 mV Pa from 24 dB A weighting from 24 dB C weighting from 30 dB LIN weighting RANGE to 115 dB A weighting to 115 dB C weighting to 115 dB LIN weighting 105 dB 130 dB from 44 dB A weighting to 137 dB A weighting 130 dB from 42 dB C weighting to 137 dB C weighting 130 dB from 46 dB LIN weighting to 137 dB LIN weighting Measurement range PEAK for the microphone sensitivity 50 mV Pa RANGE Max PEAK value 105 dB 118 dB A weighting 105 dB 118 dB C weighting 105 dB 118 dB LIN weighting 130 dB 140 dB A weighting 130 dB 140 dB C weighting 130 dB 140 dB LIN weighting Notice For the signals with the crest factor n gt 1 41 upper measuring range of the RMS LEQ and SPL is reduced The valid upper limit can be calculated according to the below given
32. MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LIN vibration scale METRIC path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS METRIC units settings selected 4 51 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The read out of the interested spectrum value can be done by means of the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt lt gt On the right side of the display the selected 1 1 octave filter center frequency or the selected TOTAL is given the current time of registered spectrum the numerical value corresponding to the position of the cursor and the units are displayed in the consecutive lines A Note The displayed units during the measurement or analysis of vibration signal depends on the different settings made in the VIBRATION UNITS METRIC or NON METRIC the SCALE position of DISPLAY SCALE LiNear or LOGarithmic and the weighting FILTER set in CHANNELS x for acceleration velocity or displacement measurements Ii ID 22 WIBRATIOMN UNITS PVIBRATION UNITS et OME TRL 10 42 10 42 DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE S i The view of the displays with different settings influencing the units of vibration results In One profile and 3 PROFILES modes the results are presented in the same way as in VLM mode with the only difference that doted lines are used instead of solid lines The active channel is changed after each pressing of lt Atlf gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt The change of the result from the same channel is done
33. MENU DISPLAY UNIT LABEL displays the type of the instrument its serial number and the current firmware version installed After pressing lt lt gt lt gt or lt gt lt gt the displayed text is scrolled on the display and the user can check the total size of internal memory and the number of standards fulfilled by the instrument The position is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt CC QUEST 5SH 82198 Quest UI 466Pro Wears 17 SH 8219 MEMORY 32MB ler 2 17 IEC 864 EH 68584 The view of the displays with the UNIT LABEL position selected a and entered b and after scrolling with lt gt lt 7 gt or lt gt lt gt c d e f and g VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 5 2 SETUP MENU The SETUP path MENU SETUP list contains different sub lists and positions Some of them are directly related with sound measurements some of them depend on the mode of the instrument sound or vibration meter and some are related with the settings of the instrument s hardware components In order to open the SETUP list the user has to e press lt gt with lt MENU gt e select highlight the SETUP text from the main list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 1 gt lt gt e press lt ENTER gt 12 05 t LA FUHCTIOHS The view of the display in the main list the SETUP text highlighted In the SETUP list the following items are av
34. NO or YES option is possible using lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt Are gou Sure E S The view of the displays during the execution of the CLEAR BUFFER operation After pressing lt ENTER gt the instrument checks its current state When measurements are being performed the execution of the CLEAR BUFFER operation is not possible In such case the message with the changing case letters is displayed see below and the instrument returns after few seconds to the list from which the CLEAR BUFFER position was called MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT IH PROGRESS IH PROGRESS The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible The instrument returns to the FILE list after the successful completion of the CLEAR BUFFER operation Checking the contents of the memory CATALOGUE The CATALOGUE position is used for checking the contents of the memory the list of the files In order to enter this position the user has to select highlight the CATALOGUE text in the FILE list using lt gt lt gt or lt lt gt lt gt and press lt ENTER gt 14 44 DEFRAGMEMTAT IOHt CLEAR BUFFER The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the CATALOGUE text highlighted When the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the CATALOGUE position the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for th
35. OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT real time analyzer The VI 400Pro conforms to type 1 accuracy Using state of the art digital signal processing the instrument has four 4 independent sound vibration level meter channels which perform signal measurements with the selectable combination of e A C LIN Z weighting filters and SLOW FAST or IMPULSE RMS detectors for sound and e HP1 HP3 HP10 W Bxy W Bz H A W Bc KB Wk Wd Wc or Wj weighting filters and 100 ms 125 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s or 10 s RMS detectors for vibration 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis works simultaneously with the channels mentioned above Acoustic measurements of SPL LEQ SEL Ld en period of measurement d day e evening n night Ltm3 Ltm5 LN statistics PEAK MAX MIN and time history are performed simultaneously in all channels refer to Appendix D 1 1 for the definitions Vibration measurements of RMS VDV PEAK P P MTVV MAX and time history are performed simultaneously in all channels refer to Appendix D 1 2 for the definitions The measurement results can be presented on the display in different formats depending on the selected function and parameter settings For sound vibration level meter function the following display modes are available e One Profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS and PLOT e For 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis the possibility to present the spectra is also available SPECTRUM mode e The s
36. OCTAVE filter The selection of 1 1 OCTAVE filter is performed after pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt The statistical analysis is also made for all TOTAL values of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis The lt ESC gt push button has to be pressed in order to leave the presentation of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis and return to the SPECTRUM display mode The view of the displays in the presentation of the statistical analysis results performed for TOTAL results of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The spectra registered in the buffer s file can be presented on the display in the BUFFER VIEW sub list of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY BUFFER VIEW These spectra are saved with the same step as selected in the SLM profiles see the description of the BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETUP sub list In order to display the file spectra registered in the buffer the user has to press the lt gt and lt gt gt push buttons for the spectra stored later press the lt gt and lt 4 gt push buttons for the spectra saved earlier In the BUFFER VIEW sub list it is also possible to examine the time history for 1 1 OCTAVE filter selected by the cursor see the description of the BUFFER VIEW sub list in Chapter 5 A Notice Many time histories can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument during the measurements performed in different sessions The presentation of these results is possible us
37. PROFILES SETUP 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM the selection of the BUFFER position A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished Ea CHAHMEL 1 CHAHHEL 2 CHAHHEL 3 CHAHHEL 4 The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the PROFILES SETUP lists path MENU INPUT 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP L notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer and the SLM Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal In level meter mode only the result coming from the MAX detector of the one channel is used for triggering purposes In the case of vibration measurements it is VECT VEC SND or MAX value The SOURCE position is not accessible in that mode However in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis it is possible to access the above mentioned position and to make a selection The results coming from the output of 1 1 OCTAVE filters starting from 125 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 8 00 kHz and 16 0 kHz are available as well as MAX result from the selected channel
38. SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM is a context element which appears on the INPUT sub list in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode 142 ID 2 MEASURE SETUP Se ate l SPECTRUM SPECTRUM CHAHHELS SETUP EGE EUF FER BUFFERS SETUP CHAHHEL 4 OFF The view of the displays in the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP window with the SPECTRUM text selected in CHANNEL x position User can switch OFF or ON SPECTRUM position in selected channels by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the INPUT sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list A Notice CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 and CHANNEL 4 position are not available The user can not ON this CHANNEL to display SPECTRUM 4 77 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER The RMS result from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument The selection of the required result is made with lt 4 gt lt gt The selection of the None text means that the RMS results are not saved in the buffer s file After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list ID 2 ID SPECTRUM SPECTRUM BUFFE
39. SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP the LEVEL setting TRIGGER Setting the parameter related with the buffer triggering PRE POST TRIGGER When the BUFFER mode is selected the text PRE POST appears at the bottom of the display use lt 7 gt to scroll to the bottom of the display After high lighting this text and pressing lt ENTER gt the settings made in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list are confirmed and the PRE POST TRIGGER sublist is opened The view of the displays in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP the PRE POST selected In the PRE line the number of the results registered in the buffer before the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be set This number is within the limits of O to 50 The time period of the measurements which are saved in the buffer is calculated multiplying the value set in the PRE by the value set in the BUFFER STEP The result of the calculation is presented in the same line at the right side of the display 4 34 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 14 18 14 19 PRE POST TRIGGER FPFE FOST TRIGGER PEE E fnis f PRE aS Amides H FRE EE Am ses POST Ambbs POST mbs IT FOST Amba Ss The view of the displays in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP the setting of the PRE TRIGGER 14 11 PRE POST TRIGGER In the POST line the number of the results registered in the buffer after the fulfilment of the triggering condition
40. Selection of the measurement range in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal RANGE The selection of the input range is possible after entering the RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE from the INPUT CHANNEL x list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The input ranges specified in Appendix C The return to the CHANNEL x list is made ignoring the changes after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt BH FUNCT IOM MEASURE SETUP CHAHHEL 3 FILE OYPFFT SETUP OY CHAHHEL 4 The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected 4 62 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL It is possible to change RANGE in SOUND mode In this case the instrument operates in two input ranges 105dB and 130dB which can be selected by means of the range position In order to change the mode of the range the user has to press lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the CHANNEL x list ignoring the changes is made after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt g all MOREE SOHC MODEC So S0OJHC RAMGE FILTER FAST DETECT FAST The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected in the case of SOUND signal A Notice It is not possible to change the range of the measurements during the execution of the measurements It
41. The name of the detector used during the calculations is presented on the display by name The PEAK value never depends on the detector time constant The view of the displays when the EXPONENTIAL option is selected in the RMS INTEGRATION The REFERENCE LEVEL sub list enables the user to set the reference level of the vibration signal The values which are set here are taken into account during the calculations of the measurement results expressed in the logarithmic scale with the dB as the units for acceleration velocity and displacement vibration measurement For sound measurements the REFERENCE LEVEL sub lists is used only to inform the user that the reference level of the acoustic signal is equal to 20 uPa 12 55 EREWCE LEVELS b The view of the display in the SETUP list path MENU SETUP REFERENCE LEVELS VIBRATION or SOUND and the setting of the REFERENCE LEVELS for vibration measurement a and for sound measurement b The VIBRATION UNITS position enables the user to select the units for the vibration measurements It is possible to select the METRIC units e g m s m s m etc or NON METRIC units e g g ips mil etc 13 01 RMS INTEGRATION REFERENCE LEWELS 17 04 13 09 WIBRATION UNITS VIBRATION UNITS UE TRL The view of the display in the SETUP list path MENU SETUP and the VIBRATION UNITS settings 4 37 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 3 ACTIVATION OF OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS The firmware version
42. The view of the display with the DISPLAY list the BACKLIGHT text highlighted Automatic switch off of the backlight TIMEOUT To conserve battery life the backlight should be used only when it is needed It is possible to set the backlight so it will automatically switch off after a certain period When this option is set 30 seconds after pressing any push button the backlight is switched off If the backlight has automatically turned off the next pressing of any push button will cause the backlight to switch on The confirmation of the selection is made by pressing lt ENTER gt The return ignoring any change is made after pressing lt ESC gt The view of the displays in the BACKLIGHT sub list a the TIMEOUT position active b Setting the brightness of the backlight BRIGHTNESS It is possible to change the brightness of the backlight using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user can select five different values of this parameter A Notice The new value of the brightness is confirmed after each pressing of lt 4 gt or lt gt the new value is selected without any confirmation from the lt ENTER gt push button VI 400PRO USER MANUA The view of the displays in the BACKLIGHT sub list the BRIGHTNESS position active The position is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt Checking specification of the instrument UNIT LABEL The UNIT LABEL position path
43. VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode VI 400Pro USER MANUAL The KB filter is used for the vibration measurements on ships Its characteristics presented below is taken from the formulae KB W Bc 28 9 dB dB dB 30 30 z0 20 10 Lo g g 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 O13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 Hz 10 2 80 21 35 27 8 25 4 27 2 24 2 15 4 13 8 re 3 8 20 6 38 7 57 2 dB The characteristics of the KB digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode The Wk filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the z direction and for vertical recumbent direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 530 O06 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 146 0 32 64 128 254 512 Hz FAD TSA EE SS 1Sie Hee era AE SRUES 0 3 24 3 58 0 14 8 25 9 42 7 60 8 dB The characteristics of the Wk digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL The Wd filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the x and y directions and for horizontal recumbent direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1999 11 01 standards
44. accepted and the file is loaded after pressing lt ENTER gt The name of this file appears in a list 12 15 FILE HANE 2 ZEME TY PARTIAL RESULTS BSh44m SENET DAILY RESULTS The view of the display with the select file a and after the execution of the operation b c The figure in the brackets on the right side of the RESULTS SEL indicates the number of selected files The message below is displayed when the selected file does not include WBV data After pressing any push button except lt Altf gt the display returns to the RESULTS SEL sub list IZ IB Ho WEL data File not loaded PRESS AHY BEY The view of the displays after the execution of loading a file without WBV data l2 22 l2 22 l2 22 The view of the displays during the execution of the setting the EXPOSURE TIME operation The EXPOSURE TIME position defines the time for the extrapolation of measurement results The required parameters can be set using lt 4 gt lt gt gt and confirmed by pressing lt ENTER gt The integration time EXPOSURE TIME can be chosen from 00h00m to 24h00m in 1m step by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt or in 30m step by pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user can set the EXPOSURE TIME for each file separately Selection of the partial results PARTIAL EAV ELV The PARTIAL EAV ELV position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC WBV CALCULATOR PARTIAL EAV ELV is used to di
45. active channel is changed after each pressing of lt gt lt gt The change of the result from the same channel is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt The LN value is changed after pressing lt Alt f gt and lt 4 gt or lt Alt f gt and lt gt BAA 40 106 Af ERNIE 136 506 Af ER 51 146 A The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes In the STATISTICS mode it is possible to select the LN value using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The active channel is presented on the left side of the display LN corresponding to the current position of the cursor is displayed in the second line value of LN in the third line and the units together with the indicator of the weighting filter in the fourth When the STATISTICS display mode is entered lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt are used for this purpose in order to change the active channel lt gt or lt Y gt should be pressed The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis with presentation of the statistical analysis in all channel VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In the PLOT display mode the results are presented which are saved in the buffer from the channels when text ON in the BUFFERS positions is selected Selection of the OFF text means that the results are not saved in the buffer s file with the step set for all channels in the BUF STEP position The active channel is changed after pressing lt gt
46. after selecting the TRIGGER SETUP text from the INPUT list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The TRIGGER SETUP sub list consists of the positions which can be set or selected These positions are as follows e The triggering of the measurements TRIGGER e The source of the triggering signal SOURCE e The level of the triggering LEVEL e The parameters related with the triggering from the buffer PRE POST TRIGGER The user can select a different high lighted parameter using lt gt lt gt Any changes made in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list require confirmation by pressing lt ENTER gt which simultaneously closes the sub list The sub list is closed at any time ignoring any changes made by pressing lt ESC gt Switching the triggering on and off TRIGGER The triggering of the measurements TRIGGER can be switched off using lt 4 gt lt gt gt 14 17 TRIGGER The view of the displays in the TRIGGER SETUP path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP sub list 4 32 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The triggering is switched on if one off its five modes is selected SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL or BUFFER The selection of the triggering mode is performed using lt 4 gt lt gt If the instrument is set for a trigger mode and the trigger condition has not been fulfilled the Tree icon will be flashing on the display The view of the displays in the TRIGGER
47. analysis mode selected in MEASUR FUNCTION sub list c 1 3 OCTAVE mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with 1 3 OCTAVE text The position of the character can be changed using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt After placing the character in the line with 1 3 OCTAVE text the user has to press lt ENTER gt which closes the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list and confirms the selection After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but any changes are ignored A Notice It is not possible to change the mode during the measurements The instrument displays in this case for about 3 seconds the text measurement in progress MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS In order to change the mode the measurement must be finished MEASUREMENT measurement IH PROGRESS in progress The view of the displays with the text informing the user about the currently performed measurements VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 5 1 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer of acoustic signal In order to select the instrument s acoustic mode the user has to enter the CHANNELS SETUP list by pressing lt Altf gt and lt MENUs selecting the INPUT text using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt and then enter the CHANNELS SETUP in similar fashion and chose the number of CHANNEL to configuration In the MODE sub list the user can select the kind of input signal which has to be measured or analysed by the instrumen
48. buffer s file BUFFERS SETUP Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis parameters for acoustic signal SPECTRUM Selection of the weighting filter in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal FILTER Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal 4 4 2 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer of vibration signal Measurement range selection in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal RANGE Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS SETUP Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis parameters for vibration signal SPECTRUM Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal 4 5 1 3 OCTAVE ANALYZER 4 5 1 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer of acoustic signal Selection of the measurement range selection in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal RANGE Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result of acoustic signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS SETUP Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis parameters for acoustic signal SPECTRUM Selection of the weighting filter in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal FILTER position Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER position Sel
49. button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list VI 400PRO USER MANUA 9 00 9 00 LOAD 11711 13APRE 2 Loaded O K 275 MAY 13 43 36 FRESS AHY KEY The view of the displays after the successful execution of the LOAD operation Removing a file with the measurement results from memory DELETE The DELETE path MENU FILE DELETE is used to remove a file from memory After pressing lt ENTER gt the instrument checks its current state When measurements are performed the DELETE position can not be entered In such case the message with the changing case letters is displayed see below and the instrument returns after few seconds to the list from which the DELETE was called MEASUREMENT Measurement IH FROGRESS in Progress The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible When the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the DELETE position the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction from the user The user should then press lt ESC gt lt ENTER gt or lt START STOP gt OPTIOWS The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the DELETE text highlighted The same information as in the LOAD position about no files exisiting in the instrument are displayed after successfully opening the DELETE position pressing lt ENTER gt In the consecutive
50. by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt nae The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes In the PLOT mode the results are presented which are saved in the buffer with the step set for all channels in the BUF STEP position The active channel is changed after pressing lt gt and lt 7 gt The position of the cursor can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt It is also possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the presented results using lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 77 gt similarly as it is done in the SPECTRUM mode The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis in the PLOT mode the registered results from all profiles VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In the SPECTRUM mode it is possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the presented results using lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt After each pressing of these buttons the presented picture moves 10 dB down or up respectively The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis with the shifted horizontal axis in relation to vertical axis The spectra registered in the buffer s file can be presented on the display in the BUFFER VIEW sub list of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY BUFFER VIEW These spectra are saved with the same step as selected in the SLM profiles see the description of the BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETU
51. characteristics of the exemplary middle digital 1 3 octave filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument 0 125 0 157 0 135 a 100 3 92 5 30 1 10 25 0 315 3 9 74 0 0 337 60 0 0 5 47 5 0 63 33 8 0 794 1 ta 4 0 03 1 26 30 0 FeFo dB The characteristics of the exemplary upper digital 1 3 octave filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument D 21 Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL INDEX OF LISTS SUB LISTS AND POSITIONS 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE 3 PROFILES ACC ANALOG AUTO SAVE AXIS SETUP BACKLIGHT BATTERY BRIGHTNESS BUF STEP BUFFER VIEW BUFFER BUFFER BUFFERS CAL LEVEL CALIBRATION CATALOGUE CHANNEL x CHANNELS SETUP CLEAR SETUP CLEAR BUFFER CLEAR CONTRAST DAILY EXPOSURE DAILY RESULTS DEFRAGMENTATION DELETE ALL DELETE DETECTOR DIGITAL IN DIGITAL OUT DIL Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis position of FUNCTION sub list Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis position of FUNCTION sub list Measurement results presentation mode numerical position of DISPLAY sub list Setting the reference level for acceleration measurements position of REFERENCE LEVEL sub list Type of input output devices sub list of EXT I O SETUP Controlling of measurement results savings position of SAVE OPTIONS sub list Assign axis of accelometer to the number of channels sub list of HAV WBV DOSE list Setting the backlight parameters sub list of DISP
52. formula A 137 20 log n 2 where A is the upper limit for the sinusoidal signal Example For the crest factor n 10 the upper limit is A 107 120 dB Vl 400Pro User Manual Measuring frequency range of the acoustic pressure with the HP filter 3 dB 10 Hz to 20 000 Hz Basic measurement error of the acoustic pressure lt 0 7 dB measured for the reference conditions see below Weighting filters see appendix D e LIN meeting requirements of the IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 Z filter e A meeting requirements of the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 A filter e C meeting requirements of the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 C filter RMS detector e Digital True RMS with PEAK detection e Resolution 0 1 dB e Range 999 9 dB e Crest Factor unlimited for signals in 20 kHz band Time weighting characteristics e S SLOW according to IEC 651 Type 1 e F FAST according to IEC 651 Type 1 e IMPULSE according to IEC 651 Type 1 Primary indicator range IEC 651 from 44 dB to 120 dB with A weighting for 130 dB reference range Linearity range IEC 804 from 44 dB to 137 dB with A weighting for 130 dB reference range Pulse range IEC 804 from 44 dB to 140 dB with A weighting for 130 dB reference range Reference conditions e Type of the acoustic field free e Reference acoustic pressure 94 0 dB re
53. from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list The assumptive setup file s name is displayed after repeated enter to the SAVE position of the FILE list after pressing lt ENTER gt 13 52 13 54 2oRS at a a Saved D K 4 b PRESS AHY KEY o The displays with the SAVE NEXT function a after saving the setup file with the increased name b and after repeated lt ENTER gt to the SAVE NEXT function c It is not possible to store the data in the file which already exists when the REPLACE position is not active The presented below message is displayed after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button in the case when during the name edition process the user selected the name which was used before The instrument then waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt Altf gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list 13 57 13 57 29R3 ee 15 Used PRESS AHY KEY a b The displays after the file s name selection a and with the message if the REPLACE position is not active b Loading the files with the configuration LOAD SETUP The LOAD SETUP path MENU FILE LOAD SETUP position is used for loading a data file from the FLASH DISC The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the LOAD SETUP text in the FILE list is highlighted selected using lt
54. gt 170 1 dB Pani 1 01 m s 17 8 m s 18 0 m s 316 m s 3 Bars 120 1 dB 145 0 dB 145 1 dB 170 0 dB 7 i 56 9 mm s 1 00 m s 1 01 m s 17 8 m s 12 Bars 95 1 dB 120 0 dB 120 1 dB 145 0 dB ae 3 20 mm s 56 2 mms 56 9 mm s 1 00 m s 1 Bar 70 1 dB 95 0 dB 95 1 dB 120 0 dB lt 3 16 mm s lt 56 2 mm s lt 70 0 dB lt 95 0 dB Tree icon is displayed in a flashing mode together with the Loudspeaker when the measurement is started the trigger is switched on and the level of the signal is too low to start the registration The view of the display with the Tree and Loudspeaker icon VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Envelope icon is presented when the current measurement results are logged in the instrument s buffer Together with this icon the Loudspeaker icon is always displayed When the Envelope icon starts flashing it means that the instrument s whole buffer is filled The new measurement result is not saved If the user wants to save these results he has to first use the CLEAR BUFFER function from the FILE list this removes all results from the buffer memory a The view of the display with the icons Envelope and with internal real time clock a Battery b Battery icon corresponds to the state of the internal battery Clock icon displays the current time when the colon is flashing or the current time
55. is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished MODE CS RAMGE FILTER DETECT The view of the displays with RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE not accessible A Notice If an OVERLOAD occurs it is signalled by the Bell icon see Chapter 3 for details Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result of acoustic signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS SETUP The measurements results from each channel can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument s SLM mode The selection of the OFF option means that no result from the described channel have to be saved in the buffer s file User can switch OFF or ON BUFFERS position by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt also returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list 15 30 14 20 MEASURE SETUP BUFFERS BUFFERS CHAHHELS SETUP CHAHHEL 1 CHAHHEL CHAHHEL 2 CHAHHEL 2 ssaa A ti CHAHHEL 3 PPAR f CHAHHEL 3 PPR 4 The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP the selection of the BUFFER position VI 4
56. its current number is presented in the first line The SETUP type of the current file is given in the third line Date and time of the SAVE operation is displayed in the fourth line The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt After pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt the first file is available and after pressing lt Altf gt with lt gt gt the last file is displayed 12 06 12 06 LOAD 1 3 LOAD 3 73 i6 JUN 15 03 16 17 JUN 05 05 02 The view of the displays during the overview of the file list VI 400PRO USER MANUA The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing lt ENTER gt The message is displayed with the name of the selected file during the execution of the operation i e SET 1 r JUF Loading The view of the display during the execution of the LOAD operation The next message is displayed after successfully loading the file The instrument waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list 12 06 12 08 LOAD 2 3 SET 1 JUP Loaded O K 17 JUH 69 605 02 FRESS AHY KEY The view of the displays after the execution of the LOAD operation VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Operations in buffer The buffer is the selected part of the instrument s memory dedicated for storing the huge number of the measurement results The
57. j The view of the displays in the CLEAR position in vibration measurements Selection of statistics levels to be saved in a file STAT LEVELS The STAT LEVELS path MENU SETUP STAT LEVELS sub list enables the user to select ten statistics from one hundred calculated in the instrument to be saved in a file together with the main results of the measurements This sub list is available only in sound mode in vibration mode it does not appear in the SETUP list E The view of the display in the SETUP list in sound measurements the STAT LEVELS text highlighted In order to enter this sub list the user has to select highlight the STAT LEVELS text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The view of the displays in the STAT LEVELS sub list The selection of the position in the sub list the proper Ni where i 1 10 is performed by means of lt gt lt Y gt The selection of a number from 1 to 99 in all ten Ni positions is done in steps equal to 1 by means of lt lt gt lt gt or in steps equal to 10 by means of lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt gt The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ENTER gt with the confirmation of all settings made in the sub list or lt ESC gt ignoring all settings made in the sub list VI 400PRO USER MANUA Selection of the external mode EXT I O SETUP Th
58. lines of the display the current file number the total number of the files the file name the file type date and time of registration are presented The change of the current file with the unit step can be done pressing lt 4 gt lt gt After pressing lt SHIFT gt with lt lt 4 gt the first file is available and after pressing lt SHIFT gt with lt gt gt the last one is displayed The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt 13 48 13 49 HO FILES DEL 1 18 DEL 3148 Be MAY 15 58 22 14 MAY 16 53 16 The view of the displays during the execution of the DELETE operation VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The name of the file is accepted and the file is deleted after pressing lt ENTER gt The message is displayed after the successful completion of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list 13 40 13 40 CEL 11711 23MAY 5 Deleted 0 K 25 MAY 13 46 25 FRESS AHY KEY The view of the displays after the successful execution of the DELETE operation Removing all files with measurement results from memory DELETE ALL The DELETE ALL path MENU FILE DELETE ALL position is used to remove all files from memory In order to enter this position the user has to select the DELETE ALL text in the FILE list using lt gt lt gt or lt lt gt lt
59. list ignoring any changes made in the sub list The view of the displays in the VECTOR DEF path MENU SETUP VECTOR DEF position the selection of the parameters A Notice It is possible to change the values during the measurements If the user selects wrong k coefficient it appears on the display the text INCORRECT SETUP VIB DOSE IS OFF and measurements of dose will not be done Otherwise the measurement will be continued The selected coefficient should be consistent with the number of selected channel in AXIS SETUP path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE AXIS SETUP 14 24 IHCORRECT SETUP VIE DOSE 15 OFF PRESS AHY KEY The view of the displays informed about wrong selected settings Selection of the vibration dose HAV WBV DOSE The HAV WBV DOSE position path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE is used to determine the vibration dose In order to enter this sub list the user has to select the HAV WBV DOSE text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The view of the display in the SETUP list in the HAV WBV DOSE text highlighted AelS SETUP STAMHDARTS The view of the displays with the HAV WBV DOSE list VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The selection of a parameter which level is to be set is done by means of the lt gt lt gt push buttons In each available position any change is performed using lt 4 gt lt gt In order to conf
60. lt Y gt should be pressed The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with presentation of the statistical analysis in all channels In the PLOT mode the results are presented which are saved in the buffer from the channels in case when text ON in the BUFFERS positions is selected and user selects in the CHANNEL x sub lists position to display in PLOT mode user can switched on V selected position to display in PLOT mode with the step set for all channels in the BUF STEP position The active channel is changed after pressing lt gt and lt 7 gt The position of the cursor can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt It is also possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the presented results using the lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt similarly as in the SPECTRUM mode VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in the PLOT mode the registered results from all channels In the SPECTRUM mode it is possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the presented results using the lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt Y gt push buttons After each pressing of these buttons the presented picture moves 10 dB down or up respectively The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the shifted horizontal axis in relation to vertical one The statistical analysis is also performed in 1 3 OCTAVE analysi
61. lt gt lt gt gt These push buttons pressed in conjunction with lt gt enable the user to e speed up the changing of the numerical values of the parameters i e the step is increased from 1 to 10 in the setting of START DELAY e insert or delete a character in the text edition modes e change the statistics class the number displayed after the letter L in One Profile and 3 PROFILES modes of result s presentation Some other possible reactions of the instrument to the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters lt A gt lt V gt These push buttons navigate up or down and enable the user to e change the mode of result s presentation e select the proper character from the list in the text edition mode e switch the active sub list in a list e programme the Real Time Clock RTC and TIMER Some other possible reactions of the instrument to the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters lt A gt lt y gt These push buttons pressed in conjunction with the lt gt enable the user to e change the relation between the Y axis and X axis of all plots presented on the screen e switch the channels and profiles in One Profile and STATISTICS modes of result s presentation e switch the active channel in 3 PROFILES mode of result s presentation Some other possible reactions of the instrument to the pressing of these push buttons
62. more than 8 hours of the continuous operation of the instrument with the backlight off The operation time is decreased about 20 with the backlight switched on The battery condition can be checked by means of the BATTERY function It is also presented continuously if the internal AA batteries are used on the display by means of the Battery icon When using the external power supply the Battery icon is not displayed on the screen but the red Ext Pwr light will be on EA Le Tl La 15 29 BATTERY 5 154 tt i b a The display in 3 PROFILES mode with the battery icon b DISPLAY BATTERY position A Notice When the AA batteries become too low the VI 400Pro will turn itself off To avoid this situation it is recommended to replace the AA batteries before they become too low or to connect the external power supply The backlight of the display can be activated by means of the lt gt push button To conserve battery power in normal day light operation it is recommended to keep the backlight off The user can also set the TIMEOUT position in the BACKLIGHT sub list of the DISPLAY list doing so will cause the backlight to automatically turn off 30 seconds after it has been turned on VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 3 3 INITIAL SETUP OF THE INSTRUMENT When the VI 400Pro is first turned on it briefly displays the manufacture and model number It then displays WARM UP TIME please wait nns
63. name the INS operation is executed when lt gt and lt gt gt are pressed together VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 13 08 FILE HAME 23ARF F66 SH DEL SH gt IHS SH4 DEL SH IHS SH DEL SH IHS FILE HAME FILE NAHE 237 PRE z900 OP The view of the displays in the FILE NAME editing after pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt The character which is highlighted is deleted from the edited name the Del operation is executed when lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt are pressed together FILE HAME 23ERPR2 SH DEL SH IMS 7 SH DEL SH IHS The view of the displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt FILE HAME FaH gta The edited name is accepted and the file is saved after pressing lt ENTER gt see the description of the SAVE NEXT function The instrument then waits for a reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed All changes introduced to the file name during the editing are ignored after pressing lt ESC gt This pressing causes the return to the list from which the SAVE SETUP option was entered The simplified edition adds a natural number to the end of the file name The increase by one number is achieved by each pressing of lt Altf gt with lt gt gt and the decrease by each pressing of lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt The number can be changed from 0 to N with the only limitation of the N value being the length of the file name which cannot ex
64. o for sound measurements LIN SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other sent to the unit by means of the serial interface 12 38 12 38 TOTAL 3 z Fo UE FILTER EEE The view of the displays with the TOTAL 3 list opened in the case of sound measurements o for vibration measurements CH VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other sent to the unit by means of the serial interface The view of the displays with the TOTAL 3 list opened in the case of vibration measurements TYPE position available only for vibration measurements available values if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSRS3 was selected in the previous position ACC VEL and DIL if the CH filter was selected the filter which was set in the 3 channel this position is not displayed CAL F position available only for vibration measurements accessible if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position if the CH filter was selected the filter which was set in the 3 channel this position is not displayed available values from 60 0dB to 60 0dB with 0 1dB step by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt or with 1 dB step by pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt Selection of the Spectrum Type SPECTRUM TYPE The SPECTRUM TYPE path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM TYPE position enables the user to change the spectrum type available values of this position ACCELERATION VELOCITY and DISPLACEMENT This sub list is available only for the vibrati
65. of the measurement set in the INT TIME if the colon is not flashing The current time of the measurement is displayed after the start of the measurement and is also shown during pause after pressing the lt PAUSE gt push button The clock icon is also updated when the last result has been suspended using lt PAUSE gt When the 2nd Func mode is selected SHIFT MODE sub list of the SETUP list the flashing text 2n dF will display instead of the clock This flashing 2n dF text will be displayed from when the lt gt push button is pressed until another push button is pressed A Notice The time of the measurement is displayed in MM SS format for the range from 1 sec to 39 minutes 59 seconds Values 40 minutes or greater are shown in HH MM format i e 00 40 Notice In all modes of the instrument the Clock icons are always shown on the display A Notice The Battery Icon is displayed only while internal AA batteries are used When the meter is powered by an external power supply the Battery icon is not displayed A Notice If the user modifes the DEFAULT SETUP and turns the unit off those changes will be saved and reused when the unit is turned back on VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT The VI 400PRO is a unique pocket sized 4 channels instrument combining functions of a sound level meter SLM a vibration level meter VLM 1 1
66. or lt V gt The position of the cursor can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt It is also possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the display using the lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt similarly as in the SPECTRUM mode The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis in the PLOT mode the registered results from CHANNEL 4 In the SPECTRUM mode it is possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the display using lt gt lt V gt After each pressing of these buttons the presented picture moves 10 dB down or up respectively The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis with the shifted horizontal axis in relation to vertical axis The statistical analysis is also performed in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis The results of this analysis are presented on the display after pressing lt ENTER gt when the instrument is in the SPECTRUM display mode After this pressing the statistical analysis performed for the selected 1 1 OCTAVE filter is shown on the display The center frequency of the filter for which the analysis was made the LN number corresponding to the cursor position the LN value and the units are presented on the right side of the display The LN value can be changed by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The view of the displays in SPECTRUM mode and after entering the presentation of the statistical analysis results performed for each 1 1
67. order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button BUFFER VIEW BATTERY The view of the displays with the DISPLAY list Selection of the modes of measurement results presentation DISPLAY MODES The DISPLAY MODES path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES sub list enables the selection of the currently available modes of displaying the results of measurement The selection is made by placing VI 400PRO USER MANUAL or replacing the special character in the high lighted displayed position of the DISPLAY MODES sub list by means of lt 4 gt lt gt gt In order to confirm the selection the user has to press lt ENTER gt The mode of the display is related with the selection of the instrument s function SLM or VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analyzer Only One Profile display mode cannot be switched off independently from the current display mode of the instrument For the Sound Level Meter or Vibration Level Meter the following possibilities of display modes are available One Profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS PLOT time history The SPECTRUM position is never available for the Sound Level Meter or Vibration Level Meter it is never high lighted Je SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES STATISTICS PLOT a The view of DISPLAY MODES path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES sub list for the SLM or VLM with all possibilities switched on a and STATISTICS and PLO
68. period of 1 second is equal to the value of the SPL function The MAX result is calculated according to the formula MAX 20 log max Py t P For the MAX result saved in the files of the buffer time history T Tp The MIN result The MIN result is calculated according to the formula MIN 20 log min Pw t p For the MIN result saved in the files of the buffer time history T Tp The LEQ result The LEQ result means the RMS value of sound pressure in the given time period The instrument operates as the standard Integrating Sound Level Meter and conforms to the IEC 804 Standard meeting the requirements for the Type 1 instrument The value of the LEQ result is calculated from the formula zi o LEQ 20 oo 7 rw t p0 Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL The RMS result The RMS result saved in the buffer s file is calculated according to the formula of the LEQ The value of the RMS result is calculated from the formula RMS 20 log rw t p at The SEL result The SEL result Sound Exposure Level is essentially the subset of the LEQ result Its value is equal to the LEQ result referred to the integration time equal to one second so for the INT TIME 1 s SEL is always equal to LEQ The value of the SEL is calculated from the formula T No SEL 20 o9 lew t Po far 0 The Ltm3 and Ltm5 results The Ltm3 and Ltm5 results Takt Maximal Levels are calculated according to the German sta
69. position is switched ON and the user selected position to be displayed in the BUFFERS SETUP CHANNEL x v In the PLOT mode the results logged in the buffer file are also given on the display in time history form Each line corresponds to one measurement result the results are registered with the step set in the BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP There are 57 lines presented on the display with the dynamics not greater than 80 dB The read out of the desired value can be done using the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt or lt gt gt The selected channel s number is presented on the left side of the display Time of the measurement and the measured result with its unit are presented on the right side of the display Each new measurement result saved in the buffer file during the PLOT mode shifts the cursor position to the right When the cursor reaches the right limit of the display new measurement results appears on the right end of the display and the results from 58 BUF STEP disappears on the left end of the display This gives the appearance of the presentation moving to the left The display is updated every BUF STEP time when the BUF STEP is set greater than or equal to 1 second and every second when the BUF STEP is set less than 1 second The displays in the PLOT mode the overview of the values later stored in the buffer After finishing the registration it is possi
70. position selected It is possible to change RANGE in VIBRATION mode The instrument operates in two input ranges 117 8 m s and 316 m s which can be selected by means of the range position In order to change the mode of the range the user has to press lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the CHANNEL x sub list ignoring the changes is made after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt 9 05 9 05 IEE HODE 17 MIER kRAHGE_ FILTER 1 s DETECT 1 8 The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected in case of VIBRATION signal A Notice It is not possible to change the range of the measurements during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished 4 75 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays with RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE not accessible A Notice If an OVERLOAD occurs it is signalled by the Bell icon cf Chapter 3 for details Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS SETUP The measurements results from each channel can be save
71. s operation as 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer is similar to the SLM measurement mode 1 In 1 1 OCTAVE analysis the spectrum is available in parallel to the SLM operation All 15 digital band pass filters with the center frequencies from 16 kHz down to 1 Hz in base two system are working in real time with the weighting filters HP LIN A or C selected in the SPECTRUM of the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP sub list The user has to select the CHANNEL number to configure the Filter and the linear RMS Detector Additionally the TOTAL RMS values for the full frequency range with the A C and LIN Z weightings are displayed In order to inform the user about the working mode of the instrument in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes doted lines are used indicating that the instrument is not in the SLM mode In the SLM mode solid lines are used BAIA 46 606 AGRE 53 7dB C The view of the displays in One profile and 3 PROFILES display mode with the doted lines indicating that the instrument is not in the SLM mode A Notice The TOTAL RMS results are measured with the weighting filters A C and LIN without taking into account the setting of the SLM profiles The spectra are always linearly averaged Thus the TOTAL values from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis can be different from those obtained for the SLM profiles if the RMS INTEGRATION was set as EXPONENTIAL 2 As 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer the instrument operates in two input ranges 105 dB and 130 dB which can be
72. the triggering level 1 00mm s 10 0km s for vibration measurements or 60dB 200dB if the reference level was set to 1pum s and the LOG logarithmic scale was selected in the DISPLAY SCALE sub list 24dB 136dB for sound measurements PRE POST TRIGGER sub list number of the records saved before PRE and after POST the triggering actually occurs PRE position available number of records 0 50 POST position available number of records 0 200 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL FUHMCT TOM ou r W Ly Lu oe a T Lu CHAHHEL 4 ivi OCTAVE SETU SPECTRUM BUFFER MEASURE SETUP CHAHHELS SETUP Hone CHAHHELS SETUP t BUFFERS SETUP TRIGGER PREYPOST TRIGGER i i OCTAVE SETUP Control diagram of the INPUT menus VI 400PRO USER MANUAL DISPLAY from main menu gt DISPLAY MODES sub list allows the user to activate V or switch off the available modes of presenting results SPECTRUM position available choices V or this position is not active in the SLM or VLM mode 3 PROFILES position available choices V or STATISTICS position available choices V or PLOT position available choices vV or gt DISPLAY SETUP sub list CHANNEL x e DISPLAY SCALE sub list 0 O SCALE position available values for the scale of graphical modes of presenting results gt LIN linear LOG logarithmic for vibration mea
73. to edit this name in two ways full and simplified The window of the full edition of the files name the FILE NAME is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the SAVE function was selected for saving the results of the measurements The user can skip the full edition of the file s name by pressing lt ENTER gt once more This will step to the phase of the file s saving described just after the FILE NAME window The FILE NAME window is presented on the Figure below The highlighted character is currently edited The lt 4 gt lt gt lt gt lt Y gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which can not exceed 8 characters FILE HAME 16MAY SEH SH2 DEL SHe INS SH2 CEL SH IHS FILE HAME EBMAYS The view of the displays during the process of setting the character in the edited name One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using lt 4 gt lt gt The available ASCII characters can be changed using lt gt lt Y gt The subsequent upper case letters digits space and underline appear on the display in the highlighted position after each pressing of the above mentioned push buttons The empty space is created for the introduction of a new character in the edited name the INS operation is executed when lt Altf gt and lt gt gt are pressed VI 400PRO USER MANUA 13 08 FILE HAME 2SAEPReS SH2 DEL SHe INSP SHe DEL SH INS SHe DEL
74. to the instrument Voltage ripple should not exceed 5 Power requirement is voltage dependent Meter Mode lt 70MA 12V at 20 C ANALYZERMode lt 100mA 12V at 20 C Meter Mode lt 40mA 24V at 20 C ANALYZER Mode lt 60mA 24V at 20 C Power Supply connector 5 5 2 1 mm external view Shiela Instrument can be also powered from the USB port of a PC however following conditions and limitations should be considered e Till the internal battery voltage is higher than approx 4 6 V the instrument operates from internal battery e When the internal battery voltage decreases below 4 6 V and the USB is connected to a PC the instrument switches to operate from the USB that is indicated by the removal of the Battery icon from the display e current capability of the USB port should be as high as 300 mA in the case of battery powered PCs this additional current requirement should be considered by the user e when an external power supply e g SA 17A or car battery is connected to Ext Power terminal no supply current is drawn from the USB as well as from internal battery VI 400Pro User Manual EXT I O amp AC Out AC Int User programmable Input Output connector AC Out Analog Output standardized output of the measured input signal from user programmable one of four channels no weightings LEMO type ERN 00 250 compatible socket external view Pin Number Shield Chassis Socket LEMO type ER
75. to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB 10 20 30 40 70 50 60 80 0 13 0 25 46 7 258 4 0 50 LRF 30 1024 Hz 53 2 dB The characteristics of the W Bz digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode D 15 Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL The H A filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the local vibration signal on the human body It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB dE o 0 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 50 90 050 1 0 20 40 80 160 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 Hz 44 6 32 0 19 9 8 4 i l 1 0 8 8 12 0 18 l 24 2 30 3 37 6 S1 4 75 8dB The characteristics of the H A digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode The W Bc filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body during the seat back measurements It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB dB g g 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 70 70 80 80 50 530 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 3 0 16 0 32 64 1238 256 512 1024 Hz PARA a Slate T echt R aea A Ar Raae a areor aea dE The characteristics of the W Bc digital filter implemented in the
76. value of the CONTINUE position to YES To confirm the change lt ENTER gt should be pressed after which the instrument returns to the active mode of measurement result s presentation starting the new measurement process VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of the vector coefficient VECTOR DEF The VECTOR DEF position path MENU SETUP VECTOR DEF is used to select the coefficient needed to calculate vibration vector The values presented below are taken into account during the calculations of the measurement results VECTOR is calculated as follows VECTOR kx k x2 kx kx Where k ko ka and k are coefficients and x4 X2 X3 and x are RMS results for different channels It is important that the user should choose only coefficients corresponding with the proper channels The user should switch on only three of the four possibilities The three selected K1 K2 K3 or K4 should represent the X Y and Z axes The VECTOR influences the calculated results If the user selects all k vectors the result will be incorrect To obtain correct results the user has to select suitable filters in CHANNEL x If the filters are incorrect the message below is displayed 10 54 IHCORFECT SETUP WIE BOSE IS OFF PRESS AHY KEY The view of the display when starting measurements if the user selected incorrect filters in INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x To enter this position the user has to select the VECTOR DEF text in the SE
77. where nn is a 60 second countdown It then enters the sound or vibration mode for channel 1 depending on which mode was used when the unit was turned off The default display mode for result s presentation is one profile see Chapter 4 for details WARM UP TIME Please wait s lt ESC to skip The view of the displays after switching on the instrument To start the measurements the user has to press lt START STOP gt push button The result of the measurement is displayed in one profile mode using large easily visible characters Under the result an analog bar indicator is presented On the left side of the display the channel being displayed CH1 CH 2 CH 3 or CH 4 the function name SPL LEQ SEL Ld Ltm3 Ltm5 Lxx PEAK MAX or MIN for sound measurements and RMS VDV PEAK P P or MTVV for vibration measurements for sound measurement the third line shows the unit of the measurement with weighted filter dB for LIN filter dB A for A filter dB C for C filter or dB G for G filter and in the fourth line the detector time constant IMP FAST or SLOW are presented For vibration measurements the fourth line displays the type of weighted filter selected in the channel HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VeIMF Dil1 Dil3 Dil10 W Bxy W Bz H A W Bc KB Wx Wa We or W Eg 0 01 ar MMS The view of the display in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode with the vibration measurement channel 1 and 2
78. will be described in details in the following chapters VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 2 2 INPUT AND OUTPUT SOCKETS OF THE INSTRUMENT The measurement inputs called Channels are placed on the top cover of the instrument There is a 4 pin Lemo socket for Channels 1 3 and a TNC connector for Channel 4 all with IEPE power supply for the accelerometers or microphone preamplifiers The microphone preamplifier 072 028 has the proper plug in with the screw for connection directly to Channel 4 of the instrument but it is recommended to use the preamplifier with any extension cable The vibration accelerometer is attached to the VI 400Pro directly or using an appropriate cable depending on the particular accelerometer being used A Notice The TNC connector is a screw on type and should be tightened to a snug fit while the Lemo connector is push pull only The full description of the signals connected to the sockets is given in the Appendix C Lemo channels 1 2 and 3 TNC channel 4 The view of the top cover of the VI 400PRO instrument in 1 1 scale In the bottom cover are three connections for USB in the middle of the figure below AC Int on the left side of the figure below and Ext Power on the right side of the figure below The view of the bottom cover of the VI 400PRO instrument in 1 1 scale The USB 1 1 interface is the serial interface working with 12 MHz clock The standard 4 pin socket used is described in detai
79. x sub list the field conditions selection for sound measurements Introduction of the filter coefficients for 1 3 1 1 OCTAVE analysis USER FILTERS The USER FILTERS path MENU SETUP USER FILTERS sub list enables the user to introduce the values of the correcting coefficients taken into account in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis The results of the analysis can be modified by the introduced factors and so calculated TOTAL values for one or two active set to On sets of the filters presented on the display In order to enter this sub list the user has to select the USER FILTERS text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt V gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The texts which appear after pressing lt ENTER gt depends on the position set in the MODE sub list 12 34 RTC EXT 170 SETUP 9 a The view of the display in the SETUP list the USER FILTERS text highlighted VI 400PRO USER MANUAL USER FILTERS sub list contains 2 sub lists gt VIBR FILTERS VIEW position o VIEW enables the user to select which filter should be viewed the available options are VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 and any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the USB interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and saved under the name VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other EDIT position o EDIT enables the user to select
80. 00PRO USER MANUAL The user can select the following results which can be saved PEAK MAX MIN and RMS in the case of sound measurement The selection of the parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list is made by pressing lt gt lt 7 gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt also returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list In order to switch parameters in the buffer the user has to place the special character in the chosen position available values are V or The selection of the required buffers parameter is made with lt 4 gt lt gt The user can pass to the selection of the next parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list pressing lt gt lt gt After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt also returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list FA BUFFERS oo OFF CHANNEL 3 25 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 1 sub list the selection of the parameters to be saved in the buffer s file The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list the all the parameters were selected to be saved in the buffer s file in CHANNEL 1 and 2 vibration and in CHANNEL 3 and 4 sound parameters A Notice The change of the channels parameters is not possible when the measure
81. 072 026 Sub Miniature Tri Axial HAV Sensor Measures 9 14 x 9 14 x 12 19 mm 0 36 x 0 36 x 0 48 in e 072 029 VI 400Pro Tri Axial WBV Sensor with cable e 072 028 Microphone Pre Amplifer For connecting 59 523 microphone to 4 input channel of VI 400Pro Microphone purchased separately e 072 032 T Handle Adapter for Hand Arm Vibration Measurements e 59 523 B amp K 4936 Class 1 Pre Polarized Microphone Pre amplifer and microphone purchased separately e 56 990 Microphone to Calibrator Adapter For 12 diameter microphone to QC series Acoustical Calibrator e QC 20 Acoustical calibrator w Selectable Output 114 dB or 94 dB at 1000 Hz or 250 Hz Microphone to Calibrator adapter purchased separately VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 2 MANUAL CONTROL OF THE INSTRUMENT The keyboard of the VI 400Pro contains 9 keys Using these 9 keys individually or in tandem with one another the user has full access to all setup and data display functions The display of the VI 400Pro presents informatation in a series of menus form which a selection can be made Although all functions can be performed on board the VI 400Pro via the keypad use of the optional Quest Suite Professonial II software significantly simplifies all tasks of setting up the unit retrieving reviewing and presentation of data 2 1 CONTROL PUSH BUTTONS ON THE FRONT PANEL The front panel of the VI 400Pro instrument contains the following control push button
82. 1 The change of the channel displayed occurs by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt 7 gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in One profile mode changing the channels 3 PROFILES mode of measurement results presentation In 3 PROFILES mode of result s presentation the selected results from each channel are displayed in three consecutive lines In each line the name of the measurement result its value and the units are presented The channels are separated by two straight horizontal lines These horizontal lines are solid in vibration level meter mode and doted in other modes 1 08 1 08 1 FEAR Slims ty 2 RMS FESmMmISe Sr RMS FRommMSe ty 32 EMS a Aim ERNIE 59 1mm The view of the displays in 3 PROFILES mode changing the channels The display shows three lines with the active channel highlighted The change of the active highlighted channel is performed by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt Y gt Switching among the simultaneously calculated results in the active channel is performed by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt Presentation of time history PLOT The PLOT mode for displaying results is available if data from at least one channel are logged in the buffer s file In the BUFFERS SETUP sub list of the INPUT list if the BUFFERS position is switched ON but the selected channel has nothing switched on V the NO RESULTS text is displayed when first enter
83. 1 q The view of the displays with the RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE selected in SOUND mode A Notice It is not possible to change the range during the execution of measurements The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished The view of the displays with RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE not accessible A Notice If an OVERLOAD occurs it is signalled by the Bell icon see Chapter 3 for details Selection of the Microphone Correction MIC CORRECTION The MIC CORRECTION position defines the optional microphone correction factor applied to SOUND measurements When the MIC CORRECTION position is high lighted pressing lt ENTER gt opens a sub list with the choices of DIFFUSE F Diffuse Field and OUTDOOR 4 MODECS gt SOUND RANGE 1309 PROFILE 1 a The view of displays with MIC CORRECTION position selected a and after lt ENTER gt b VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The MIC CORRECTION is an optional choice that can be set to DIFFUSE F DIFFUSE FIELD to OUTDOOR or not selected at all Use lt gt lt Y gt to select high light the desired DIFFUSE F or OUTDOOR position Use lt 4 gt lt gt gt to select check mark or deselect no check mark a choice Pressing lt ENTER gt accepts the choice and returns to the previous li
84. 16 m s which can be selected by means of the range position In order to change the mode of the range the user has to press lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the CHANNEL x list ignoring the changes is made after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 9 05 9 05 WIBR WIBR AHGE 1 4 1 4 The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected in case of VIBRATION signal A Notice It is not possible to change the range of the measurements during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished DETECT The view of the displays with RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE not accessible A Notice If an OVERLOAD occurs it is signalled by the Bell icon see Chapter 3 for details Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFES SETUP The measurements results from each channel can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument s VLM mode The selection of the OFF option means that no result from the described channel have to be saved in the buffer s f
85. 2 17 of the VI 400Pro has no user actived optional functions VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 4 1 1 OCTAVE ANALYZER The VI 400Pro has four independent sound vibration level meters channels which perform the measurement of the signal with the selectable combination the user can configure each channel separately In order to select the 1 1 OCTAVE analysis mode the user has to enter the FUNCTION list by pressing the lt gt with lt MENUs gt selecting FUNCTION text using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing the lt ENTER gt Then the user has to open the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list using the lt 4 gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt 5 to high light the MEASUR FUNCTION text and pressing lt ENTER gt 13 54 4 LEWEL METER J I i OCTAVE 173 OCTAVE FFT c The view of the displays in the main list with the FUNCTION text selected a the FUNCTION list path MENU FUNCTION MEASUR FUNCTION opened with the MEASUR FUNCTION text selected b 1 1 OCTAVE analysis mode selected in MEASUR FUNCTION sub list c 1 1 OCTAVE mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with 1 1 OCTAVE text The position of the character can be changed using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt After placing the character in the line with 1 1 OCTAVE text the user has to press lt ENTER gt which closes the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list and confirms the selection Pressing lt
86. 3 OCTAVE SETU FFT SETUP The view of the displays in the main list with the INPUT text selected a and the INPUT list opened in LEVEL METER b 1 1 OCTAVE c 1 3 OCTAVE d and FFT e mode The majority of the settings made in the INPUT list are common for the measurements of acoustic and vibration signals A Notice Parameters in the INPUT list can be only be changed when the instrument is not executing a measurement A particular parameter s field that can be changed will be highlighted A parameter s field that can not be changed will not be highlighted The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is performing a measurement th EA 0 01 MODEC Sa SOUND 13606 LIH FAST The view of the displays with the active a and not active b the CHANNEL x sub list path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL 3 RAMGE FILTER DETECT VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of measurement parameters MEASURE SETUP All settings made in MEASURE SETUP are common for sound and vibration level meters The MEASURE SETUP sub list opens after the selecting the MEASURE SETUP text from the INPUT list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The MEASURE SETUP sub list consists of the parameters which can be set specifically they are the delay of the start of measurements START DELAY the integration time INT TIME the repetition of the measurement cycles REP CYC
87. 7 44k a b The view of the display with BUFFER VIEW sub list in the case when there are no files in the buffer in the unit with 8 MB of internal memory a and with 32 MB of internal memory b VI 400PRO USER MANUA The contents of the selected file from the buffer is displayed after pressing lt ENTER gt The cursor position is changed after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt The type of the registered result the number of the channel the result is coming from the related time from the beginning of the registration the value with the units and the indicator of the filter are presented on the right side of the display The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer the change of the cursor position The scrolling of the display is made when the cursor is at the left or right limits of the graphical display and lt 4 gt lt gt gt are still pressed and there are still results in the file The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer the scrolling to the left The position of the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis can be changed after pressing lt gt lt Y gt together with the lt Alif gt The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer the change of the axis relation The selected file in the buffer can contain the measurement results from up to 4 channels i e PEAK1 MAX1 PEAK3 MIN3 PEAK4 MAX4 MIN4 RMS4 PEAK1 MAX1 and the spectra Th
88. 9 LAK GUAGE STAT LEVELS TIMER EXT IZO SETUP RIC SHIFT_MODE USER FILTERS 41 MMs 3 WARHINGS VECTOR DEF HAU WB DOSE TEL Lil The view of the displays with the SETUP list Programming of the instrument s internal timer TIMER The TIMER path MENU SETUP TIMER position enables the user to program the internal timer The instrument can turn itself on at the programmed time and perform measurements using the set up from when the unit was last turned off In order to enter this position the user has to select the TIMER text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt lISER FILTERS STAT LEVELS 3 The view of the display in the SETUP list in the TIMER text highlighted The operation of the TIMER path MENU SETUP TIMER setting is performed in the same way as it was described in the case of the FILE NAME window The selection of the setting parameter is performed using lt gt lt V gt and the change of its value using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user must then press lt ENTER gt to accept the changes made and return to the SETUP list or press lt ESC gt to ignore the changes made and return to the SETUP list The view of the TIMER position VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Programming of the instrument s internal Real Time Clock RTC The RTC path MENU SETUP RTC position enables the user to program the internal Real Time Clock This clock is
89. 9 14 09 FEHCE LEVELS PEHEE LEVELS MrS ET ve l me The view of the displays with the different reference levels influencing the measurement vibration results presented in the logarithmic units decibels 4 73 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes the results are presented in the same way as in the case of the VLM mode with only one difference that instead of the solid lines doted lines are used The active channel is changed after each pressing of lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt The change of the result from the same channel is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt 14 14 4 iCH_ 39 2 PERE Bb 92mm ise iP P Perr a aa Er erie Dilz BRE 143rmmis The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes In the PLOT mode the results are presented which are saved in the buffer from the channels when text ON in the BUFFERS positions is selected and user selects in the CHANNEL x sub lists position to display in PLOT mode The selection of the OFF text means that the results are not saved in the buffer s file with the step set for all channels in the BUF STEP position The active channel is changed after pressing lt gt and lt 7 gt The position of the cursor can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt It is also possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the presented result
90. CTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM the selection of the BUFFER position A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished CHAMMEL CHAHHEL 4 The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP lists path MENU INPUT 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer and the VLM Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal In level meter mode only the result coming from the RMS detector of channel one is used for triggering purposes In the case of vibration measurements it is VECTOR VEC SND or RMS value The SOURCE position is not accessible in that mode However in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis it is possible to access the above mentioned position and to make a selection The results coming from the output of 1 1 OCTAVE filters starting from 125 Hz 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 8 00 kHz and 16 0 kHz are available as well as RMS result from the selected channel VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the di
91. CTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode Using the SPECTRUM sub list one can select in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis the weighting filter and the result which are to be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument The user can select it for each CHANNEL separately The user can switch OFF or ON SPECTRUM position in selected channels by pressing lt lt gt or lt gt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the INPUT sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing lt ESC gt 8 55 MEASURE SETUP CHAHHELS SETUP BUFFERS SETUP The view of the displays in the INPUT sub list path MENU INPUT 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM With the SPECTRUM sub list in 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer Selection of the weighting filter in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal FILTER The following weighting filters are available in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis A type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards C type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards LIN conforms to the requirements for the Z filter of type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard HP high pass filter for 1 1 OCTAVE analysis The view of the displays with the SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM opened the selection of the weighting filter The characteristics of the filters are given in Appendix D The selection of the required filter i
92. D Sil a 13 MAY 15 37 16 The view of the displays during the execution of the LOAD operation The current number of the file and the total number of the saved files is displayed in the first line The name of the file is highlighted in the second line its current number is presented in the first line If the file contains the results from the buffer the number of the buffer is displayed at the right end of this line The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE etc and measure mode in each of four channels SOUND or VIBRATION are given in the third line Date and time of the SAVE operation is displayed in the fourth line The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt After pressing lt SHIFT gt with lt 4 gt the first file is available and after pressing lt SHIFT gt with lt gt gt the last one is displayed 13 46 13 46 LOAD 3 11 LOAD 3 11 E 12 MAY 15 51 28 14 MAY 13 z 4 12 The view of the displays during the overview of the file list The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing lt ENTER gt The message is displayed with the name of the selected file during the execution of the operation i e 13AFF Loading The view of the display during the execution of the LOAD operation The next message is displayed after a successful loading operation The instrument waits for the reaction from the user any push
93. E OPTIONS enables one to set the options of the measurement result savings LOAD enables one to load into the working space of the instruments memory the measurement results saved in a file DELETE enables one to delete a selected file from the instrument s memory DELETE ALL enables one to delete all files from the instrument s memory DEFRAGMENTATION enables one to recover the memory which was used by the deleting files CLEAR BUFFER enables one to delete all files from the buffer of the instrument CATALOGUE enables one to overview the catalogue of the files saved in the instrument s memory FREE SPACE informs the user about the capacity of the instrument s memory still available for storing measurement results SAVE SETUP enables one to set the configuration of the meter LOAD SETUP enables one to load the configuration saved in a file Pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt Altf gt and lt 7 gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list CATALOGUE FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP The view of the displays with the FILE list of the instrument In each available position any change is performed using lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignor
94. ES TOTAL 2 TOTAL 3 CH VUSRI1 path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES TOTAL 3 SPECTRUM TYPE ACCELERATION path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM TYPE For vibration measurement results the ACC and VEL filters are always switched on The values presented in the BUFFER VIEW when the VIBR METER is selected contain one TOTAL value calculated for the whole band with the HP filter and the values calculated with the ACC and VEL filters respectively When the user wants to examine the contents of the buffer with the vibration measurements but the SOUND METER is active the values for the ACC and VEL filters are not available In this case only one TOTAL value is presented As it was mentioned above the user can observe the time history for all 1 1 and 1 3 octave filters as well as TOTAL values after pressing lt ENTER gt on a required filter In order to observe the time history for another filter while being in time history window the user has to press lt gt or lt V gt After pressing the lt gt push button the time history for the higher frequency filter can be seen The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the change of the time histories of the filters and the filters after pressing lt gt After pressing the lt gt push button the time history for the lower frequency filter can be seen The view of the displays with the
95. ESC gt the sub list is also closed but any changes are ignored A Notice It is not possible to change the mode during actual measurements The instrument displays for about 2 seconds the text measurement in progress MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS In order to change the mode the measurement must be finished MEASUREMENT measurement IH PROGRESS in progress The view of the displays with the text informing the user about the currently performed measurements VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 4 1 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer of acoustic signal In order to select the instrument s acoustic mode the user has to enter the CHANNELS SETUP list by pressing lt gt with lt MENU gt selecting the INPUT text using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt and then enter the CHANNELS SETUP as previously done choosing the CHANNEL number to configure In the MODE sub list the user can select the kind of input signal to be measured or analysed by the instrument For acoustic signals the SOUND METER option should be selected by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt selecting SOUND mode and pressing lt ENTER gt which closes the MODE sub list The MODE sub list is closed ignoring any changes made by pressing lt ESC gt a The view of the displays in the CHANNEL x path MENU INPUT list with the CHANNEL x text selected a the VIBR METER mode selected b and the SOUND METER mode selected c The instrument
96. ETER mode provides the user the function of SLM Sound Level Meter meeting the IEC 651 IEC 804 and IEC 61672 1 standards for Type 1 accuracy and or the function of VLM Vibration Level Meter meeting the ISO 8041 standard The instrument can also be used for the long term acoustic and vibration monitoring logging the results in the large 32MB memory To select the LM mode path MENU FUNCTION MEASUR FUNCTION LEVEL METER the user will select lt MENU gt use lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt to select FUNCTION and press lt ENTER gt The FUNCTION list contains two sub lists MEASUR FUNCTION and CALIBRATION Next the user will select MEASUR FUNCTION using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and then press lt ENTER gt 0 24 DISPLAY FILE a The view of the displays with the main list the FUNCTION selected a and the FUNCTION list opened the MEASUR FUNCTION selected b After entering the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list the set of the available functions appears on the display Currently active function is marked by the special character The view of the displays in the MEASUR FUNCTION path MENU FUNCTION MEASUR FUNCTION sub list the selection of the measurement mode The LM mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with the LEVEL METER text The position of the character can be changed using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt P
97. EXPOSURE results The results are displayed in one column and represented by six positions for each file separately The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the PARTIAL EXP text in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt The view of the display in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list the PARTIAL RESULTS text highlighted The user can review the PARTIAL EXP sub list and EAV ELV list using lt gt lt Y gt The return to the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt B44 BY PARTIAL ESF PARTIAL ESF EAN EL 44 10 mist 4 1 68 mise BHG Be gt l As 5 2z 6 r MisE J f Be epeo oea g 22 MSE B rr Mise BEB BEBO 6 Be be Bee The view of the display with the PARTIAL EXPOSURE and EAV ELV results for selected file 5 65 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of the daily result DAILY RESULTS The DAILY RESULTS position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC WBV CALCULATOR DAILY EXPOSURE is used to display DAILY EXPOSURE and DAILY DOSE results for each selected file separately The result is calculated relatively to EXPOSURE TIME The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the DAILY REeuE text in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt
98. FERENCE LEVEL 5 27 Setting the reference level of the acceleration signal ACC 5 27 Setting the reference level of the velocity signal VEL 5 27 Setting the reference level of the displacement signal DIL 5 28 Selection of the vibration units VIBRATION UNITS 5 28 Selection of the warnings WARNINGS 5 29 Saving the measurement results in a file RES NOT SAVE 5 29 Selection of the vector coefficient VECTOR DEF 5 30 Selection of the vibration dose HAV WBV DOSE 5 31 Selection of the parameters of vibration dose MEASURE DOSE 5 32 Selection of the parameters of vibration dose EXPOSURE TIME 5 32 Selection of the parameters of vibration dose AXIS SETUP 5 33 Selection of the standard of vibration dose STANDARDS 5 34 5 3 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS 5 36 Saving files 5 36 Selection of the file s operation FILE 5 37 Saving files in the instrument s memory SAVE and SAVE NEXT 5 38 Controlling the data storing in the instrument s memory SAVE OPTIONS 5 41 Saving of the filters to the RAM memory RAM FILE 5 41 Replacement of the existing files by the new ones REPLACE 5 41 Controlling of the measurement statistics savings SAVE STAT 5 42 Controlling of the measurement results savings AUTO SAVE 5 42 Loading the files with the measurement results LOAD 5 43 Removing a file with the measurement results from memory DELETE 5 45 Removing all files with measurement results from memory DELETE ALL 5 46 Memory m
99. HP filter implemented in 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis in the VI 400Pro instrument 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2045 4096 Hz 2 9 0 6 O 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB The characteristics of the HP digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis D 19 Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL The digital 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument 0 125 0 177 0 25 0 354 0 5 0 707 1 1 414 2 2 828 4 FeFo 105 6 87 2 65 5 45 9 TAr 3 00 0 00 3 0L 29 2 SIIL 131 2 dB The characteristics of the exemplary digital 1 1 octave filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument VI 400Pro USER MANUAL 0 158 0 25 0 315 0 3937 88 6 75 9 66 7 58 0 0 5 45 8 0 63 37 5 0 794 19 6 1 0 00 1 26 1 58 25 53 60 8 2 122 3 dE 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 r 80 530 FeFo dB The characteristics of the exemplary lower digital 1 3 octave filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument dE a 10 0 157 0 158 0 25 0 315 SIO2 SRE ark 6520 0 397 54 8 0 5 46 0 0 63 35 2 0 794 15 5 1 e 1 26 037 32 5 1 587 337 9 dE 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 r0 80 530 FeFo dB The
100. ISPLAY SETUP text highlighted The DISPLAY SCALE path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE sub list enables the user to change the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results time history in the PLOT and so called spectra in the SPECTRUM It can be done in the SCALE position of the DISPLAY SCALE sub list The user can set the parameters for each channel separately It is also possible to change the dynamics of the vertical axis by means of the DYNAMIC position In order to enter this list one has to press lt ENTER gt on the high lighted DISPLAY SCALE text of the DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x list The DISPLAY SCALE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the CHANNEL x list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes 12 20 11 54 SPECTRUM TYPE The view of the display with the DISPLAY SETUP list the DISPLAY SCALE text highlighted VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of the scale in graphical results presentations DISPLAY SCALE The DISPLAY SCALE path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE sub list enables the user to change the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results time history in the PLOT and so called spectra in the SPECTRUM It is possible to change the scale of the vertical axis only In order to enter this lis
101. ISPLAY list after pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt Setting the contrast of the display CONTRAST The CONTRAST path MENU DISPLAY CONTRAST position enables the user to set the proper contrast of the display by using lt 4 gt lt gt The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt on the highlighted CONTRAST text The user can select 11 different values of this parameter 14 34 LAY SETUP ER WIE The view of the display with the DISPLAY list the CONTRAST text highlighted A Notice The new value of the contrast is confirmed after each pressing of lt 4 gt or lt gt the new value is selected without any confirmation from the lt ENTER gt push button The position is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 14 35 CONTRAST CONTRAST CONTRAST A JE T 1E The view of the displays with the CONTRAST position the change of the display contrast Setting the backlight parameters BACKLIGHT The BACKLIGHT path MENU DISPLAY BACKLIGHT sub list enables the user to set the parameters of the backlight of the display and the keyboard using lt 4 gt lt gt gt or lt gt lt Y gt The user can set the backlight to automatically switch off after a certain period as well as set the brightness of the backlight The sub list is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt on the highlighted BACKLIGHT text
102. LAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES Selection of the Weighted Filters for the 1 profile TOTAL 1 The TOTAL 1 sub list enables one to select the weighted filter to be used for the calculation of the TOTAL value in the first profile FILTER In the case of vibration measurements it is also possible to determine the type TYPE of the filter and the calibration coefficient CAL F The TOTAL 1 sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the TOTAL VALUES list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes FILTER position available values of the weighted filters o for sound measurements A SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other sent to the unit by means of the serial interface The view of the displays with the TOTAL 1 list opened in the case of sound measurements o for vibration measurements HP VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other sent to the unit by means of the serial interface The view of the displays with the TOTAL 1 list opened in the case of vibration measurements TYPE position available only for vibration measurements available values if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the previous position ACC VEL and DIL if the HP filter was selected in the previous position this position is not displayed The displays with the TOTAL 1 list opened in the case of vibration measurements USER3 filter selected VI 400PRO USE
103. LAY list Checking the state of the internal battery position of DISPLAY list Setting the brightness of the backlight position of BRIGHTNESS sub list Setting time between two writings to the buffer s file position of MEASURE SETUP sub list Selection of the buffer s file to the screen presentation sub list of DISPLAY list Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result to be saved in the buffer s file position of SPECTRUM sub list Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result to be saved in the buffer s file position of SPECTRUM sub list Selection of the result to be saved in the buffer s file position of BUFFERS SETUP sub list Setting the level of the calibrator s signal position of CALIBRATION sub list Calibration of sound measurement channel sub list of FUNCTION list Controlling the contents of the memory position of FILE list Setting parameters in a profile of SLM sub list of CHANNELS SETUP sub list Setting parameters in profiles and for octave analysis sub list of INPUT list Return to the factory made settings position of SETUP list Removing all files with the results from buffers memory position of FILE list Clearing the coefficients of the user filters position of USER FILTER sub list Setting the contrast of the screen position of DISPLAY list Displaying the daily exposure in DOSE mode sub list of HAV CALCULATOR sub list Displaying the daily exposure and daily dose in DOSE mode sub list of WBV CALCULATOR sub list
104. LE and the buffers step BUF STEP To change the highlighted parameter press lt gt or lt gt The value of the highlighted parameter is incremented in single digits using lt 4 gt or lt gt The value of the highlighted parameter is incremented in tens using lt gt with lt 4 gt or lt gt with lt gt The confirmation of any change made in the sub list requires pressing lt ENTER gt which simultaneously closes the sub list The MEASURE SETUP sub list is closed ignoring any changes made after pressing in any time the lt ESC gt push button 9 IE 9 19 START PPE START THEE IHT TIME sj IHT TIME REP CYCLE Int REP CYCLE BUF STEP is BUF STEP The view of the displays with the MEASURE SETUP sub list opened path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP Setting time delay before the start of measurements START DELAY The START DELAY position defines the time delay that will occur from when lt START STOP gt is pressed until the start of the measurements This delay can be set from 1 second to 60 seconds in 1 second steps using lt 4 gt lt gt gt or in 10 second steps using lt Alt f gt with lt 4 gt lt gt gt lt ENTER gt must be pressed to confirm the selection this will simultaneously close the MEASURE SETUP sub list A Notice The digital filters of the instrument are always applied to the input signal even when the measurements are stopped A Notice The minimum delay
105. LEQ 24 006 C J SEL 6t 109E Ar SEL 64 1 JE kE 1E The view of the instrument s displays in 3 PROFILES display mode in SLM operating mode The instrument working in SLM mode CHANNEL 1 2 AND 3 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL A Notice The PEAK result never depends on the detector time constant The LEQ SEL and Ld en results do not depend on the detector time constant if the LINEAR option was selected in the RMS INTEGRATION position of the SETUP list The LEQ SEL and Ld en results depend on the detector time constant if the EXPONENTIAL option was selected in the RMS INTEGRATION position of the SETUP Each of the sound channels simultaneously measure the following results see Appendix D for the definitions PEAK MAX MIN SPL displayed SPL is the largest result of the selected RMS detector measured over the last second LEQ SEL Ldx x period of measurement d day e evening n night Ltm3 Ltm5 LN where N is statistics class from 1 to 99 selected by the user Current measurement time available in the result s field only in 3 PROFILES display mode I 22 FBG 86 06 81 2 LEH 24 306 C J MAKS 66 29E The view of the instrument s display in 3 PROFILES display mode with the current measurement time for CHANNEL 1 in SLM mode A Notice Switching between the channels is possible by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt 7 gt Switching between the results for the sel
106. LIN METRIC path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS METRIC units first TOTAL value selected as HP second TOTAL value selected as CH and third TOTAL value selected as VUSR1 and in the first channel an acceleration HP displacement Dil1 or defined by user VUSR1 filter selected 4 72 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration spectrum expressed in LINear METRIC units the first TOTAL value selected as HP acceleration filter the second TOTAL value selected as CH 2 and one of the displacement filters Dil1 selected there or TOTAL 2 selected as USER VIBRATION filter the third TOTAL value selected as CH 3 and one of the displacement filters selected there Dill or TOTAL 3 selected as USER VIBRATION displacement filter The view of the displays with the same vibration 1 3 OCTAVE spectrum presented as acceleration velocity or displacement in LOGarithmic units with the different DYNAMIC value the lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt push buttons were also used for shifting up or down the vertical axis When the logarithmic units are selected for the presentation of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results the displayed measurement values depend on the reference level set for the acceleration velocity and displacement in the REFERENCE LEVEL window of the SETUP list path MENU SETUP REFERENCE LEVEL VIBRATION 14 09 RMS INTEGRAT IOMt TARTIDA ONY TS WARHIMGS 4 14 0
107. M FIL REPLACE RAM FIL REPLACE SAWE STAT SAWE STAT AUTO SAVE AUTO SAVE The displays during the execution of the SAVE OPTIONS the selection of the AUTO SAVE parameters VI 400PRO USER MANUA The window for the editing the base name for the self saved files is opened the FILE NAME after pressing lt ENTER gt when the AUTO SAVE position is activated This window is not accessed when the instrument is performing measurements or when they are paused In such a case the message with changing case letters is displayed see below and the instrument returns to the list from which the SAVE OPTION sub list was called MERSUREMENT measurement IH FROGRESS in progress The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible When the AUTO SAVE option is not active after pressing lt ENTER gt the instrument returns to the FILE list The name of the AUTO SAVE files is up to eight characters long starting with the special character FILE HAME FILE HAME aRES1238 m123456m SH DEL SHe INS PSH lt DEL SHe INS PSH2 DEL SHe INsS The view of the displays after entering the FILE NAME edit mode for the files saved with the AUTO SAVE option active after pressing lt ENTER gt in the SAVE OPTIONS sub list the AUTO SAVE switched on FILE HAME Ch Sam Loading the files with the measurement results LOAD The LOAD position path MENU FILE LOAD is used for loading da
108. MAX RMS VDV Current measurement time time is available in the result s field only in 3 PROFILES display mode 10 4 10 43 10 43 FERRI Ge ee 81 39 2Mg 2i RMS 39 2Mg 2 RMS 79 2mg HASH Emt 60 60 61 f 3 F F 496 mil SiPEAK 279 milg 3 PEAK 29 mil gy4 5PiL 63 106 Emid Ge 66 81 The view of the instrument s display in 3 PROFILES display mode scrolling through all four channels with the current measurement time displayed A Notice Switching between the channels is possible by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt gt Switching between the results for the selected highlighted channel is made possible by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt By pressing lt gt or lt gt the user can switch the display mode the way the measurement results are presented to VI 400PRO USER MANUAL One profile or 3 PROFILES or PLOT from the channel in which the measurement resluts were stored in the buffer files the number of the channel is displayed with the name of the result i e CH1 PEAK CH2 RMS CH3 MAX etc A Notice The user can select the currently active mode of the results presented by means of the DISPLAY MODES sub list of the DISPLAY list The activation of a mode is indicated by the graphical symbol placed in the proper line of the DISPLAY MODES sub list Below the view of the displays is presented with all active modes checked on vj and all non active modes unc
109. N 00 250 compatible Output Voltage 0 2 VRMS 5 at input level 105 dB dB related to 1 uV for 105 dB range 0 2 VRMS 5 at input level 130 dB dB related to 1 uV for 130 dB range Frequency Band 3 dB 0 6 Hz 22 6 kHz Output impedance 51 Q 1 EXT I O External Input Output digital Input Output pin 3 3 V input amp output levels Below the electrical characteristic of AC Int socket in the VI 400Pro unit is described more precisely 1 If the instrument is switched off the AC Int is in the active state as the input ready to switch on the instrument cf the requirements for the switching signal stated in 3 1 below 2 If the instrument is switched on three possibilities are available selected by the user from the menu set as the default after switching on the unit a AC as standardised output of the measured signal one from four channels selected by the user b Int as Input SLAVE mode used for the external triggering of the instrument the parameters of the triggering signal are stated in 3 2 below c Int as Output MASTER mode used for the external instruments triggering the parameters of the signal of the external triggering is stated in 3 3 below 3 Specification of the external signals 3 1 The signal for switching on the instrument cf point 1 the voltage impulse with the parameters given below a Recommended voltage range is 12 V abs max 15 V the TRANSIL type internal limi
110. NDARDS In order to enter this sub list the user has to select highlight the WBV CALCULATOR text in the HAV WBV CALC list using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and press lt ENTER gt The selection of a parameter which level has to be set is done by means of lt gt lt 7 gt In the WBV CALCULATOR sub list the following items are available RESULTS SEL position which enables the user to select files with measurement s results PARTIAL EAV ELV position which displays the partial result of dose PARTIAL RESULTS position which displays the result of partial exposure VI 400PRO USER MANUA DAILY RESULTS position which displays the results of daily exposure and daily dose The user can select highlight an available position from the main list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press lt ESC gt 1146 E PARTIAL RESULTS DAILY RESULTS The view of the displays with the WBV CALCULATOR list Selection of the file with result of measurement RESULT SEL The RESULT SEL position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC WBV CALCULATOR RESULTS SEL is used to load a data file from the FLASH DISC User selects which files of measurement should be used to determine results of meas
111. OAD occurs it is signalled by the Bell icon see Chapter 3 for details VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result of acoustic signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS SETUP The measurements results from each channel can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument s SLM mode The selection of the OFF option means that no result from the described channel have to be saved in the buffer s file The user can switch OFF or ON BUFFERS position by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing lt ESC gt Hee 4 20 14 20 MEASURE SETUP BUFFERS oe BUFFERS CHAHHELS SETUP CHAHMHEL 1 MF a CHAHHEL 1 mF a CHAHHEL 2 sasaa CHAHHEL 2 wean a ti CHAHHEL 3 PPAR OF CHAHHEL 3 PPR 4 The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP the selection of the BUFFERS store The user can select the following results which can be saved PEAK MAX MIN and RMS in the case of sound measurement In order to switch parameters in the buffer the user has to place the special character in the chosen position available values are V or The selection of the required buffers parameter is made with lt 4 gt lt gt The user can pass to the selection of the next para
112. P sub list In order to display the spectra registered in the buffer s file the user has to press lt gt for the spectra stored later press lt 4 gt for the spectra saved earlier In the BUFFER VIEW sub list it is also possible to examine the time history for 1 1 OCTAVE filter selected by the cursor see the description of the BUFFER VIEW sub list in Chapter 5 A Notice Many time histories can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument during the measurements performed in different sessions The presentation of these results is possible using the BUFFER VIEW window of the DISPLAY list see Chapter 5 Measurement range selection in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal RANGE The selection of the input range is possible after entering the RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE from the INPUT CHANNEL x list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The input ranges are specified in Appendix C The return to the CHANNEL x list ignoring the changes is made after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt BH FUHCTIOM MEASURE SETUP CHAHHEL 3 OY CHAHHEL 4 FILE OYPFFT SETUP The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE position selected It is possible to change RANGE in VIBRATION mode In this case the instrument operates in two input ranges 117 8 m s or 3
113. POST text appears at the bottom of the display use lt 7 gt to scroll to the bottom of the display This mode of triggering influences the total amount of measurement results that are stored in the buffer for each triggered event that occurs If the triggering signal is greater then the selected LEVEL the following results are saved in the buffer e the results registered directly before the fulfilment of the triggering condition is saved time of this registration is calculated and displayed by multiplying the value set in the PRE TRIGGER by the step taken from the BUFFER STEP in the MEASURE SETUP sub list e all measurement results while the triggering signal exceeds the LEVEL and e the results registered directly after the fulfilment of the triggering condition time of this registration is calculated and displayed by multiplying the value set in the POST TRIGGER by the step taken from the BUFFER STEP Selection of the triggering signal in SLM SOURCE It is assumed that in the sound level meter mode there are three triggering signal available VECT VEC SND MAX Setting the level of triggering LEVEL The level of the triggering LEVEL can be set from 24 dB to 136 dB in 1 dB step using lt 4 gt lt gt gt or 10 dB steps using lt 4 gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt 14 44 14 44 BUFFER J TRIGGER BUFFER SOURCE WECT SOURCE JECT LEWEL PEET eae LEVEL PRE PO EU PRE PO a The view of the displays in the TRIGGER
114. Pro instrument in the SLM mode LIN cut off frequency 27 0 Hz 0 1 dB 10 0 Hz 3 0 dB 0 158 0 313 0 625 1 25 2 5 5 10 20 40 50 160 320 640 Hz 97 1 E a a e 40 9 E a 12 6 3 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Characteristics of the LIN filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the SLM mode VI 400Pro USER MANUAL A type 1 according to IEC 651 standard 3 906 7 513 15 625 125 250 s500 iog0 2000 4000 S000 1isao Hz 102 2 78 5 57 2 o Pe 16 2 8 7 DENE 0 0 1 2 1 0 1 0 6 3 dB Characteristics of the A filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the SLM mode C type 1 according to IEC 651 standard 3 906 7 513 15 625 SL 63 125 250 s500 ioga 2000 4000 S000 1ieao Hz 25 9 SLE eSa a 0 8 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 8 2 9 5 8 dB Characteristics of the C filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the SLM mode Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL The digital weighting filters implemented in the VLM mode The HP1 filter is used for the vibration measurements the acceleration signal in the frequency range from 1 Hz to 20 kHz dB 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 14 0 32 54 128 256 512 1024 2048 4056 Hz 13 8 6 7 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Characteristics of the HP1 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Proinstrument in the VLM mode for the acceleration measurements The HP3 filter is used
115. R lt BR BUFFER Maie The view of the displays in the SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT PROFILES SETUP 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM the selection of the BUFFER position A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP lists path MENU INPUT 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer and the VLM Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal In level meter mode only the result coming from the RMS detector of channel one is used for triggering purposes In the case of vibration measurements it is VECT or RMS value The SOURCE position is not accessible in that mode However in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis it is possible to access the above mentioned position and to make a selection The results coming from the output of 1 3 OCTAVE filters starting from 125 Hz 125 Hz 160 Hz 200 Hz 250 Hz 8 00 kHz 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 16 0 kHz and 20 0 kHz are available a
116. R MANUAL CAL F position available only for vibration measurements accessible if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position if the HP filter was selected this position is not displayed available values from 60 0dB to 60 0dB with 0 1dB step by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt or with 1 dB step by pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt 12 05 12 09 12 09 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 FILTER VISKI FILTER WUSRI FILTER VISKI TYFE ACC TYPE ACC TYPE ACC AL F EAE CAL F MBSE CAL F BRR The displays with the TOTAL 1 list opened in the case of vibration measurements calibration factor setting Selection of the Weighted Filters for the 2 profile TOTAL 2 The TOTAL 2 sub list enables one to select the weighted filter to be used for the calculation of the TOTAL value in the second profile FILTER its type TYPE and the calibration coefficient CAL F The TOTAL 2 sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the TOTAL VALUES list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes FILTER position available values of the weighted filters o for sound measurements C SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other sent to the unit by means of the serial interface 2b l amp r TOTAL Z 2 Rk UE FILTER EE The view of the displays with the TOTAL 2 list opened in the case of sound measurements o for v
117. R sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt 5 22 ExaPOSURE EsPOSURE D 49 msr 3 16 mise q The view of the display with the EXPOSURE and EAV ELV results for selected file Selection of the daily exposure DAILY EXPOSURE The DAILY EXPOSURE position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR DAILY EXPOSURE is used to display DAILY EXPOSURE results for each selected file separately The result is counted relatively to EXPOSURE TIME The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the DAILY EXPOSURE text in the HAV CALCULATOR list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the HAV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt The view of the display in the HAV CALCULATOR sub list the DAILY EXPOSURE text highlighted 10 59 DAILY EXPOSURE mfse The view of the display with the DAILY EXPOSURE result for selecting file Selection of the calculation results WBV CALCULATOR The WBV CALCULATOR position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC WBV CALCULATOR is available in VLM mode and used to calculate the various WBV parameters It enables the user to analyse results based on data saved in files There are calculated the PARTIAL EAV ELV PARTIAL EXPOSURE DAILY EXPOSURE and DAILY DOSE of vibration All results are calculated according to the standard selected in STANDARD position path SETUP HAV WBV DOSE STA
118. RNINGS VECTOR DEF HAV WBV DOSE MENU LOCK measurements and which informs the user about the reference level in the sound measurements position which enables the user to select the vibration units in which the results of the measurements are to be given sub list which enables the user to switch on or off the warnings which can be displayed during the operation of the instrument sub list which enables the user to select coefficients needed to calculate vibration vector which is taken into account during the calculation of measurement results sub list which enables the user to select parameters presenting the EXPOSURE and VIBRATION DOSE measurements position which enables the user to select the type of menu lock to be used choices are NO LOCK PARTIAL and FULL LOCK VI 400PRO USER MANUA Pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing lt Altf gt and lt 7 gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list In each available position any change is performed by means of the lt 4 gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the lt ENTER gt push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button le 19 2 1
119. SC gt 14 te Are gou SURE E S The view of the displays before the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation Pressing lt ENTER gt when the YES option is selected and the instrument is not performing measurements merges the memory The message presented below is displayed when the operation is not required The instrument waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list The operation is not executed when FREE SPACE is equal to TOTAL AVAILABLE 5 47 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 10 03 14 4 FREE SPACE DEFRAGMENTAT IOH b Unnecessary S6641127 bytes PRESS AHY KEY The view of the display in the case when the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not required When the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is performed the following texts are displayed see Fig a and b below 13 24 Defragmentation Clearin aitis Waita The view of the displays during the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation During this wait time the instrument recovers the memory which was used by deleted files clears it and merges in one block The message presented below is displayed after successful memory merging see Fig c below The instrument waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list The result of t
120. SC gt J MODE 1 RAHGE FILTER DETECT A FAST a b The view of the displays in the CHANNEL x path MENU INPUT list with the CHANNEL x text selected a the SOUND METER mode selected b and the VIBR METER mode selected c In 1 1 OCTAVE analysis the spectrum is available in parallel to the VLM operation All 15 digital band pass filters with the center frequencies from 16 kHz down to 1 Hz in base two system are working in the real time with the linear RMS Detector displayed in the SPECTRUM sub list of the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP In order to inform the user about the working mode of the instrument in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes doted lines are used for the indication that the instrument is not in VLM mode In the VLM mode continuous lines are used The view of the displays in One profile and 3 PROFILES display mode with the doted lines indicating that the instrument is not in the VLM mode A Note The TOTAL RMS result is measured with the HP weighting filter and takes no account of the VLM profile settings The spectra are always linearly averaged Thus the TOTAL value from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis can differ from those obtained in the VLM profiles if the RMS INTEGRATION is set to EXPONENTIAL In order to change the display mode the user has to press lt gt or lt 7 gt The following modes are available One profile 3 PROFILES SPECTRUM and PLOT A Notice The user can select the numbe
121. SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP with the SLOPE modes selected When the SLOPE mode is selected the measurement starts when the signal increases past the level determined in the LEVEL The measurement is stopped when the conditions set in the MEASURE SETUP sub list are fulfilled after pressing lt START STOP gt or after receiving the proper remote control code When the SLOPE mode is selected the measurement starts when the signal decreases past the level determined in the LEVEL A Notice In VLM mode the only triggering signal is the signal coming from the RMS detector of the first channel The view of the displays in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP with the LEVEL modes selected When the LEVEL mode is selected the triggering condition is checked each second the measurement is registered only when the signal is greater than the LEVEL in any other case the measurement result is skipped When the LEVEL mode is selected the triggering condition is checked each second the measurement is registered only when the signal is lower than the LEVEL in any other case the measurement result is skipped 14 24 TRIGGER SOURCE LEVEL ide PRE POST Bri The view of the displays in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP with the BUFFER mode selected VI 400PRO USER MANUAL If the TRIGGER SETUP has been set to BUFFER mode the PRE
122. SH IHS FILE HARE FILE HAE 237 PRE 239A OP The view of the displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt gt The highlighted character is deleted from the edited name the Del operation is executed when the lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt are pressed FILE HAME 23RPR2 SH DEL SH INS ISH DEL SH IHS The view of the displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt FILE HAME FaH pu The edited name is accepted and the file is saved after pressing lt ENTER gt see the description of the SAVE NEXT function The instrument waits then for a reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed All changes introduced to the file name during editing are ignored after pressing lt ESC gt This pressing causes the return to the list from which the SAVE option was entered The simplified edition adds a natural number to the end of the file name The increase by one number is achieved by each pressing of lt Altf gt with lt gt and the decrease by each pressing of lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt The number can be changed from 0 to N with the only limitation of the N value being the length of the file name which cannot exceed 8 characters in length 12 43 I2 44 The view of the displays in the simplified edition of the file name The instrument attempts to save a file after pressing lt ENTER gt The saving is not possible when the instru
123. SOURCE s SOURCE H ANNEL CHAHHEL CHAMNEL LEVEL 16808 of LEVEL ieGde LEVEL iG dB 4 4 49 g 19 14 42 BUFFER Gees BUFFER Re BUFFER 5 CHAH CHAHHEL LEWEL 1 d 4 LEVEL iaGde ifade 49 The view of the displays in TRIGGER SETUP window the selection of the signal used for triggering purposes in BUFFER mode A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer and the SLM 4 67 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 5 2 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer of vibration signal In order to select the instrument s vibration mode the user has to enter the CHANNELS SETUP sub list by pressing lt Altf gt and lt MENU gt selecting the INPUT text using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt and then enter the CHANNELS SETUP in a similar fashion and chose CHANNELx to configuration In the MODE sub list the user can select the kind of input signal which has to be measured or analysed by the instrument In the case of vibration signals the VIBRATION METER option should b
124. Sie i024 2048 4096 Hz 77 1 56 8 38 6 26 7 28 2 34 0 40 0 46 1 52 1 58 1 64 1 70 1 76 2 852 2 85 1 dB The characteristics of the Vel3 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the velocity measurements 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 Sie 1024 2048 4096 Hz 117 1 36 85 78 1 60 0 43 3 36 1 40 1 46 0 52 1 55 1 64 1 70 1 76 2 52 2 55 1 dB The characteristics of the Vel10 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the velocity measurements VI 400Pro USER MANUAL The VelMF filter is used for the evaluation of the state of the machines This filter is used for the measurements in the frequency range from 10 Hz to 1000 Hz and conforms to the ISO 10816 standard dE 30 o 50 cena iene 100 e oe 0 25 0 50 1 0 7 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 125 256 Biz 1024 2048 4098 Hz 108 0 93 6 80 2 6 7 aa sa la 45 9 52 1 58 1 64 2 AraAra 100 1 126 3 dB The characteristics of the VeIMF digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the velocity measurements The digital filters implemented in the vibration level meter VLM mode for the displacement measurements 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 Hz 61 9 43 4 HALA 32 43 8 55 9 68 0 80 1 32 1 104 2 116 2 128 3dB The characteristics of the Dil
125. T switched off b For the frequency analysis of the measured signal 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE the following display modes are available One Profile SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES STATISTICS PLOT time history 7 E mra Lod Ld a The view of the DISPLAY MODES sub list with all possibilities of results presentation for the frequency analysis switched on a and STATISTICS and PLOT switched off b The PLOT display mode is available if data from at least one channel are logged in the buffer s file If the BUFFERS position in BUFFERS SETUP sub list is switched ON but there was nothing stored in the buffer s file in the selected channel there was nothing switched on v instead of PEAK MAX MIN or RMS the NO RESULTS text is displayed after the first input to this mode see Figure below When the BUFFERS are selected as non active BUFFER OFF and for all channels are set the PLOT mode of results presentation is skipped There is PLOT display when the BUFFERS position is switched ON and user selected position to display in BUFFERS SETUP CHANNEL x V VI 400PRO USER MANUA The view of the display in the PLOT mode when there is nothing in the buffer to be displayed after setting PLOT as active Each position of the DISPLAY MODES sub list can be switched on or off independently The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list ignoring changes made in the DISPLAY MODES su
126. TAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the user can set the values of correcting coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters gt 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL o gt ee gt 20 0kHz available values of 20 kHz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB e CLEAR position o CLEAR enables the user to select which filters should be cleared the available options are ALL SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other STAT LEVELS sub list available only in the sound meter mode Enables the user to select ten separate values Ni i 1 10 of the LN statistics to be saved with the main results in a file N1 position the first value of the LN statistics to be saved with the main results in a file available values any number from 1 to 99 N10 position the tenth value of the LN statistics to be saved with the main results in a file available values any number from 1 to 99 EXT I O SETUP sub list enables the user to connect the instrument with another device and define the working mode of the AC Int connection MODE o ANALOG position in this mode the meter can output signals from the selected CHANNEL to the connected device the user may choose CHANNEL 1 2 3 or 4 o DIGITALIN position in this mode the device connected to the AC Int connection will trigger the VI 400Pro to undertake measurements This mode is used in conjunction with the EXT TRIGGER fu
127. TER gt 12 4 SEMSITIWITY B oE The view of the displays with the selected calibration mode and after pressing lt ENTER gt 2 Set the sensitivity of the microphone taken from its calibration card using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and then press lt ENTER gt The calibration factor is calculated after pressing lt ENTER gt in the relation to 50 0 mV Pa To exit from this screen without changing the calibration factor press lt ESC gt For a microphone sensitivity greater than 50 0 mV Pa the resulting calibration factor is negative SEMSITIWITY SEMSITIWITY a AdE 1 608 b The view of the displays while setting the sensitivity greater then 50 0 mV Pa a and after pressing lt ENTER gt with the resulting calibration factor calculated b For a microphone sensitivity less than 50 0 mV Pa the resulting calibration factor is positive SEMSITIWT Ts SEMSITIWIT TY a AdE 6 AdE The view of the displays while setting the sensitivity less than 50 0 mV Pa a and after pressing lt ENTER gt with the resulting calibration factor calculated b The lowest microphone sensitivity value allowed is 50 0 uV Pa it will result in a calibration factor of 60 0 dB The greatest microphone sensitivity value allowed is 50 0 V Pa it will result in a calibration factor of 60 0 dB A Notice The calibration factor is always added to the results of sound level measurement
128. TS SEL list MLN 1 zs af 4 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In order to enter the file the user has to select a position using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt FILE WARE FILE HANE FILE HANE Baham Behe Bsh44m The view of the displays during the execution of the selected file operation The current file is displayed in the first line The name of the file is highlighted in the second line The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt After pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt the first file is available and after pressing lt Altf gt with the last one is displayed The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing lt ENTER gt The name of this file appears in a list 14 42 FILE HANE F PARTIAL ESF azhggm DAILY EXPOSURE a The view of the display with the selecting file a and after the execution of the operation b c The figure in the brackets on the right side of the RESULTS SEL indicates the number of selected files The message is displayed when the selected file does not include H A data The instrument waits for the reaction from the user till any push button lt Altf gt is pressed After that the display returns to the RESULTS SEL list 14 49 Ho H A data File not loaded PRESS AHY BEY The view of the displays after the execution of the operation 14 52 14 52
129. TUP list using lt gt lt Y gt or lt 4 gt lt gt After the selection lt ENTER gt must be pressed The view of the display in the SETUP list the VECTOR DEF text highlighted The selection of the position in the sub list is performed using lt gt lt gt The value is introduced by pressing lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt gt The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP sub list after pressing lt ENTER gt confirming all settings made in the sub list or lt ESC gt ignoring all settings made in the sub list Ei EZ EZ E The view of the displays in the VECTOR DEF path MENU SETUP VECTOR DEF position the setting of the value coefficient VI 400PRO USER MANUA The user can select the following coefficients K1 K2 K3 and K4 The selection of the parameter from the VECTOR DEF sub list is made by pressing lt gt lt gt and lt 4 gt lt gt To switch on the displaying of vector s parameters the user has to place the special character available values V or in the chosen position using lt Alif gt and lt 4 gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt gt The user can pass to the selection of the next parameter from the VECTOR DEF sub list pressing lt gt lt gt and lt 4 gt lt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the SETUP sub
130. U INPUT 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM opened the selection of the weighting filter The characteristics of the filters are given in Appendix D The selection of the required filter is made with lt 4 gt lt gt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt the user can confirm the selection and close the sub list Pressing lt ESC gt also returns to the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER position The RMS or LEQ when the user selects A filter in FILTER position in SPECTRUM sub list results from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument The selection of the required result is made with lt 4 gt lt gt gt The selection of the None text means that the RMS or LEQ results are not saved in the buffer s file After pressing lt ENTER gt the user can confirm the selection and close the sub list Pressing lt ESC gt also returns to the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNELx sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list The view of the displays in the SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT PROFILES SETUP 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM the selection of the BUFFER position A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high li
131. USB 1 1 requirements and enables remote control of the instrument and data transfer up to attainable with 12 MHz clock USB socket external view shield Real Time Clock Built in real time clock Accuracy better than 1 minute month Weight with the battery 520 g without accelerometer cable and microphone preamplifier Dimensions 44x84x145 mm without accelerometer cable and microphone preamplifier Electromagnetic Compatibility The product described above is in conformity with 1 89 336 EEC EMC Directive of 03 May 1989 amended by 92 31 EEC Directive of 22 April 1992 and 93 68 EEC Directive of 22 July 1993 and 2 72 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive of 19 February 1973 amended by 93 68 EEC Directive of 22 July 1993 Notice EMC compatibility is guarantied only with the original accessories supplied by QUEST TECHNOLOGIES Safety Instrument meets EN 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 General requirements Environmental parameters e Operating temperature range 10 C 50 C e Storage temperature range 20 C 60 C e Humidity 90 RH in 30 C non condensing C 12 VI 400Pro USER MANUAL The MAX result The MAX result saved in the buffer s file is calculated according to the formula MAX max Pw t The MAX main result is calculated according to the formula MAX max p t fort 1sec The MTVV res
132. VE SETUS FILE The displays viewed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button three consecutive times from the MEASURE SETUP sub list Some of the sub lists end with the window informing the user about the state of the instrument available memory non existing files or buffers standards fulfilled by the unit etc VI 400PRO USER MANUAL B cb DEFRAGMENMTATIONG FREE EAR BUFFER SPACE 162513 TOTAL _AWAILABLE 16251358 bytes The view of the displays during and after the accessing the FREE SPACE window path MENU FILE In order to close such window the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button In the instrument there are also windows which are used for entering text i e the name of the file B 29 B 29 FILE HAME FILE HANE E BI MAY SH DEL SHe INS SH lt DEL SH gt IHS The displays during the edition of the text which will be the name of the file as saved in instruments memory Below the structure of the elements of the main list is presented The more detailed description of the FUNCTION and INPUT lists is given in Chapter 4 and the DISPLAY FILE AUX FUNCTIONS and SETUP lists in Chapter 5 FUNCTION one of the main lists available after pressing the lt MENU gt push button gt MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list LEVEL METER position available values 7 1 1 OCTAVE position available values 1 3 OCTAVE position available values FFT position avail
133. able values Note The indicates which of the meter functions has been selected Only one selected measurement function is available at any given time gt CALIBRATION sub list CHANNEL x e BY SENSITIVITY sub list o SENSIYIVITY position evallaple values of the calibration level gt 10 pV ms 10 V ms for vibration measurements and gt 50pV Pa 50 V Pa for sound measurements o CAL FACTOR position it displays the calculated calibration factor e BY MEASUREMENT sub list o CAL LEVEL position avalanie values of the calibration level gt 100mm s 1km s for vibration measurements or 100 dB 180 dB if the reference level was set to 1 um s and the LOG logarithmic scale was selected in the DISPLAY SCALE sub list gt 54dB 134dB for sound measurements o CAL FACTOR position it displays the calculated calibration factor after the measurement VI 400PRO USER MANUAL LEVEL METER Tei OCTAVE 173 OCTAVE FFT 4 43 MEASUR FUNCTION gpg plar 153 EY SEHSITIUITY Er MEASUREMENT Control diagram of the FUNCTION list INPUT from main list gt MEASURE SETUP sub list START DELAY position the time delay before measurements begin being collected available values 1s 60s INT TIME position integration time available values 1s 24h REP CYCLE position the number of measurement cycles which have to be repeated available values Inf 1 1000
134. ailable LANGUAGE TIMER RTC USER FILTERS STAT LEVELS EXT I O SETUP SHIFT MODE CLEAR SETUP RMS INTEGRATION position which enables the user to set the Language as RUSSIAN or ENGLISH position which enables the user to set the Timer function position which enables the user to set the Real Time Clock sub lists which enable the user to select switch on or off and set the correcting values for all 1 1 and 1 3 octave filters for sound measurements for vibration measurements the weighting filters are always switched on the user can set the correcting coefficients sub list position available only in the sound meter mode It enables the user to select ten statistics results to be saved in a file together with the main results This position is not shown in the menu for vibration meter mode sub list which enables the user to set the input output options for connection with external devices sub list which enables the user to set the operating mode of the lt Altf gt and the lt START STOP gt push buttons position which enables the user to return to the manufacture s set up except the coefficients set in the USER FILTERS position which enables the user to select the way of integration for the RMS measurement in the case of vibration meter or the LEQ measurement in the case of sound level meter REFERENCE LEVEL position which enables the user to select the reference level for the vibration VIBRATION UNITS WA
135. asurements the cal measure text toggles from big small letters At the end of the measurement the calibration result is displayed on the bottom line of the display It is recommended to repeat the calibration measurement a few times The obtained results should be almost the same with 0 4 dB Possible reasons for the unstable results are as follows e the calibrator is not properly attached to the instrument e there are external disturbances e the calibrator or the measurement channel the microphone the preamplifier or the instrument itself are damaged A Notice During the calibration measurement external disturbances acoustic noise or vibrations should not exceed the value of 100 aB 4 Press the lt ENTER gt push button to accept the measurement result After pressing lt ENTER gt the calibration factor is calculated stored and displayed cf next Figure A Notice The user has to press lt ESC gt in order to quit the calibration procedure without saving the calibration factor 24 59 CAL LEVEL dB FACTOR C 4 306 a b The view of the displays after the measurements a and after the acceptance of the value of the calibration factor b A Notice The calibration factor is always added to the measurement results of level meter mode and the frequency analysis results of the acoustic signal 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 2 LEVEL METER The LEVEL M
136. at the instrument is not in the SLM mode A Notice The TOTAL RMS results are measured with the weighting filters A C and LIN without taking into account the setting of the SLM profiles The spectra are always linearly averaged Thus the TOTAL values from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be different from those obtained for the SLM profiles if the RMS INTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION was set as EXPONENTIAL 2 As 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer the instrument operates in two input ranges 105 dB and 130 dB which can be selected by means of the RANGE position In order to change the mode of the display presentation the user has to press lt gt or lt Y gt The following modes are available One profile SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES STATISTICS and PLOT VI 400PRO USER MANUAL A Notice The user can select the number of the currently active display modes switching on V or off the given mode in the DISPLAY sub list of the DISPLAY list Only one profile mode cannot be switched off See Chapter 5 for the details about the display modes control One Profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS and PLOT display modes are identical as for the SLM The SPECTRUM mode displays 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results so called spectrum together with the TOTAL RMS values measured with A C and LIN weighting filters The read out of the interested spectrum value can be done by means of the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt lt gt On the right side o
137. b list the reference level of the acoustic signal Selection of the vibration units VIBRATION UNITS The VIBRATION UNITS path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS position enables the user to select the units for the vibration measurements To enter this position the user has to select the VIBRATION UNITS text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt V gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The view of the display in the SETUP list the VIBRATION UNITS text highlighted It is possible to select the METRIC units e g m s m s m etc or NON METRIC units e g g ips mil etc The selection is done using lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored P24 124 WIBRATIOMN UNITS VIBRATION UNITS PER HOME TRI The view of the displays with the available options of the VIBRATION UNITS position VI 400PRO USER MANUA Selection of the warnings WARNINGS The WARNINGS path MENU SETUP WARNINGS sub list enables the user to select the messages which could be displayed during the operation of the instrument To enter this sub list the user has to select the WARNINGS text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt In the internal firmware version 2 17 this sub list contains only
138. b list after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming changes made in the DISPLAY MODES sub list after pressing lt ENTER gt Selection of the parameters in graphical results presentations DISPLAY SETUP The DISPLAY SETUP path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP sub list enables the user to change several parameters of the graphical results presentations for each channel separately Namely one can select using the DISPLAY SCALE sub list the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results time history in the PLOT and so called spectra in the SPECTRUM Using the TOTAL VALUES sub list it is possible to select the weighted filters used in the calculation of the Total values This sub list appears on the display only in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer Using the SPECTRUM TYPE sub list it is possible to select the type of the spectrum which has to be presented during vibration measurements This sub list appears on the display only in the case of the VIBR METER mode selection In order to enter the DISPLAY SETUP list one has to press lt ENTER gt on the high lighted DISPLAY SETUP text of the DISPLAY list The DISPLAY SETUP sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes lz DISPLAY MODES OT Fia 4 BATTERY The view of the display with the DISPLAY list the D
139. be saved Available operations on files main list function of the push button Selection of the weighting filter position of CHANNEL x sub list Selection of the weighting filter in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis position of SPECTRUM sub list Selection of the weighting filter in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis position of SPECTRUM sub list Checking the free space in the memory position of FILE list Selection of the unit s measurement function main list function of the push button Selection of DOSE measurements position of FUNCTION sub list Selection of DOSE measurements position of FUNCTION sub list Measurement parameters setting main list function of the push button Setting the integration time position of MEASURE SETUP sub list Selection of LM function position of FUNCTION sub list Selection of the triggering mode position of TRIGGER SETUP sub list Loading configuration from the memory with the instruments configuration position of FILE list Loading file from the memory with the measurements results position of FILE list MEASURE FUNCTION Selection of the available measurement function sub list of FUNCTION list MEASURE SETUP MEASURE DOSE PARTIAL EXP PARTIAL RESULTS PARTIAL EAV ELV PLOT RAM FILE RANGE RANGE RANGE Selection of measurement parameters sub list of INPUT list MEASURE SETUP sub list Activation of the MEASURE DOSE sub list of HAV WBV DOSE list Displaying the partial exposure in DOSE mode sub list of
140. below For each channel the selected result is displayed on the left side followed by its value and units The units depend on the setting in the VIBRATION UNITS sub lists of the SETUP list path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS METRIC or NON METRIC and the setting in the SCALE position of the DISPLAY SCALE sub list of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE LiNear or LOGarithmic ID 16 ID 16 ID 16 HAGE Berm tstt i RMS azmnmis j 1 RAS Azmi zD z95rmm H EAU 295 mmf Ss WD zagr S FP FP T Dmm 3 P P T D m HHA m m The view of the instrument s displays in 3 PROFILES display mode in VLM mode in CHANNELS 1 2 and 3 with METRIC VIBRATION UNITS and LINear SCALE settings ID I I 2 PREM 166 146 1 RMS 166 106 1 RMS 166 19E 2 UDW 169 406 PRE 169 406 2 UDW 1609 406 SrP P 194 59E SrP P 194 806 BAe 124 56 The view of the instrument s displays in 3 PROFILES display mode in VLM mode in CHANNELS 1 2 and 3 with LOGarithmic SCALE setting 0 24 0 24 1 24 1s FEHE 1fimg 1 PEAK 1fimg 1 PEAK 1fimg 2 UDI Pemula i Smash 2s UD Ammi TH ee 216 mil 3 P P 216 mil RA i mil The view of the instrument s displays in 3 PROFILES display mode in VLM mode in CHANNELS 1 2 and 3 with NON METRIC VIBRATION UNITS and LINear SCALE settings For each of the four independent channels the following results are measured simultaneously see Appendix D for the definitions PEAK P P MTVV or
141. ble to overview all saved results For this reason the cursor has to be placed to the left or right limit of the presentation Each press of lt 4 gt lt gt results in the respective display of the earlier or later value The whole presented time history is shifted one position to the right or left The displays in the PLOT mode the overview of the values earlier stored in the buffer If a selected result is saved in each channel to view time history in other channels the user has to press lt gt or lt 7 gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The displays in the PLOT mode the change of the profile and channels In the PLOT mode it is possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis using lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt gt Each press of lt gt with lt gt results in a 10 dB shift down of the presentation and each press of lt gt with lt Y gt results in a 10 dB shift up The view of the displays in the PLOT mode with the shifted axes A Notice Many time histories can be stored registered in the buffer during measurements The user can select the required time history for presentation in the BUFFER VIEW window available in the DISPLAY list see Chapter 5 for details VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 2 2 Vibration level meter When the VI 400PRO is working as a vibration level meter the main results of the channels are presented on the display in the form described
142. buffer operation is strongly dependent on the operation mode of the instrument the selected function A Notice The new file in the buffer is created after each start of the new measurement The contents of the buffer all registered files are erased after execution the CLEAR BUFFER operation from the FILE list It is not possible to erase only one or a few selected files from the buffer 1 In the Sound Level Meter mode selected results from each of four channels can be logged in the buffer s file with the time step defined in the BUF STEP position If the value set in this position is equal to 1 sec thus for three profile results logging the buffer is fulfilled after 168 hours or 7 days of the continuous work If the results from only one profile are saved the buffer will be filled after 500 hours 21 days of work EXAMPLE 1 Assuming that the following settings are selected MEASURE SETUP sub list INT TIME 10 m REP CYCLE 1 BUF STEP 1 s BUFFERS SETUP sub list CHANNEL 1 BUFFERS PEAK CHANNEL 2 BUFFERS RMS CHANNEL 3 BUFFERS None CHANNEL 4 BUFFERS None Then after 10 minutes the value set in INT TIME position and after one measurement cycle the value set in the REP CYCLE position the current file in the buffer will contain 600 PEAK values from channel 1 and 600 one second RMS values one second set in the BUF STEP position from channel 2 EXAMPLE 2 Assuming that the instrument set up is as follow
143. can be set This number is within the limits of O to 200 The time period of the measurements which are saved in the buffer is calculated multiplying the value set in the POST by the value set in the BUFFER STEP The result of the calculation is presented in the same line at the right side of the display 14 22 14 24 14 24 PRE POST TRIGGER j FPRFE PFOST TRIGGER PRE POST TRIGGER RE 36 mobs PRE 38 mobs f FEE 3 amas F POST GS mbes POST EE OGM ss POSTS ee Sms The view of the displays in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP the setting of the POST TRIGGER The value set in the PRE POST are confirmed and the sub list is closed after pressing lt ENTER gt Pressing lt ESC gt the sub list would be closed ignoring the settings made in the PRE POST The other parameters important for the sound measurements can be set by means of the SETUP list after pressing lt MENU gt selecting the SETUP text u lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt 12 40 n USER FILTERS RIC USEF FILTERS I SHIFT MODE 4 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In the SETUP list the following items are available LANGUAGE sub list which enables the user to select a choice of RUSSIAN or ENGLISH TIMER position which enables the user to set the Timer function RTC position which enables the user to set the Real Time Clock USER FILTERS sub list which enables the user to select v
144. ceed 8 characters in length 12 44 I2 44 op a Sty The view of the displays in the simplified edition of the file name The SAVE position is displayed once more after about 3 seconds The message presented below is displayed after pressing lt ENTER gt when the file of the selected name already exists in the instrument s memory The instrument then waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the SAVE position 3 26 29APF a 15 used PRESS AHY KEY The view of the displays after the SAVE operation when the file with the selected name already exists in the instrument s memory VI 400PRO USER MANUA The setup is saved in the file with the name increased by one number at the end of the SAVE NEXT text after pressing lt ENTER gt if the instrument is not measuring and there is a setup to be stored A Notice In the SAVE NEXT function it is possible to save a setup file bypressing lt ENTER gt skipping the full or simplified edition of the file s name The following message containing the name of the file and the operation performed is displayed during the setup file s saving 29AFF Saving The view of the display during the execution of the SAVE SETUP operation Another message is displayed after successfully saving the setup file in the memory and then the instrument waits for the reaction
145. cies 1 Hz to 16 kHz Type 1 IEC 1260 and 45 filters with center frequencies 0 8 Hz to 20 kHz Type 1 IEC 1260 e FFT calculation optional 1920 lines in real time up to 22 4 kHz with Hanning window and linear averaging spectra parallel to the SLM operation VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Analyzer Kits e VI 400Pro Real Time Vibration Analyzer Less Sensors Includes VI 400Pro Analyzer w USB Computer Interface cable and 072 008 Storage case e VI 400Pro Real Time Hand Arm Vibration Analyzer Kit Includes VI 400Pro Real Time Vibration Analyzer w USB Computer Interface cable 072 010 Tri axial HAV sensor 072 022 Sensor Cable 072 005 HAV Sensor Mounting Block and Clamp Assembly and 072 008 Storage case e VI 400Pro Real Time Whole Body Vibration Analyzer Kit Includes VI 400Pro Real Time Vibration Analyzer w USB Computer Interface cable 072 011 Tri Axial WBV Seat Pad Sensor 072 022 Sensor Cable and 072 008 Storage Case e VI 400Pro Real Time Hand Arm amp Whole Body Vibration Analyzer kit Includes VI 400Pro Real Time Vibration Analyzer 072 010 Tri axial HAV sensor 072 005 HAV Sensor Mounting Block and Clamp Assembly 072 011 Tri Axial WBV Seat Pad Sensor 072 022 Sensor Cable and 072 008 Storage Case Optional Accessories e QSP PROII QuestSuite Pro Il Single User License e QSP PROII 10 QuestSuite Pro Il Ten User License e QSP PROII UNL QuestSuite Pro Il Unlimited User License e 072 018 Handheld Vibration Calibrator Shaker e
146. d in the buffer s file of the instrument s VLM mode The selection of the OFF option means that no result from the described channel have to be saved in the buffer s file The user can switch OFF or ON BUFFERS position by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt The selection of the OFF text means that the results are not saved in the buffer s file After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list 14 24 13 04 MEASURE SETUP BUFFERS BUFFERS pei CHAHHELS SETUP CHAHHEL CHAHHEL 1 ates CHAHHEL 2 CHAHHEL 2 waaae a tI CHAMHEL 3 Fam tif CHAHHEL 3 Pam at The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list list path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP the selection of the BUFFERS store The user can select the following results which can be saved PEAK P P MAX and RMS for vibration measurement The selection of the parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list is made by pressing lt gt lt V gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list In order to switch parameters in the buffer the user has to place special character in the chosen position available values are V or The selection of the required buffers parameter
147. displayed in the top right corner of the instrument s display In order to enter this position the user has to select the RTC text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt 1 71 TIMER USER FILTERS 1 a The view of the display in the SETUP list in the RTC text highlighted The operation of the RTC setting is performed in the same way as it was described in the case of the FILE NAME window The selection of the setting parameter is performed using lt 4 gt lt gt gt and the change of its value using lt gt lt Y gt The parameter which value has to be changed is flashing The view of the RTC position A Notice The new value of a parameter is confirmed after each pressing of lt gt lt gt new value is selected without any confirmation from the lt ENTER gt push button The position is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ENTER gt or lt ESC gt Setting the conditions for the diffuse field measurements FIELD CORRECTION The MICROPHONE CORRECTION path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x position is available only in the case of the sound measurements It enables the user to set the proper conditions for making the measurements in the diffuse field In order to enter this position the user has to select the FIELD CORRECTION text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt
148. double four times and eight times expansion as the default the vertical axis corresponds to 80 dB after expansion it corresponds to 40 dB 20 dB and 10 dB respectively using lt 4 gt lt gt gt This setting is always valid only for the measurements of sound and for vibrations if the LOGarithmic scale was selected 12 4 PERY Sr AEe DIS ro ET peal ae The view of the displays with the possible values of the vertical axis in PLOT and SPECTRUM presentations Scaling of the horizontal axis of the graphical presentation X ZOOM It is not possible in version 2 17 of the internal firmware to change by means of lt 4 gt lt gt gt the horizontal axis the default value of the multiplier of this axis is equal to 1 VI 400PRO USER MANUA Selection of the weighted Filters TOTAL VALUES The TOTAL VALUES path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES sub list which is available only in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis enables the user to select the weighted filters In order to enter this list one has to press lt ENTER gt on the high lighted TOTAL VALUES text of the DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x list The TOTAL VALUES sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the CHANNEL x list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 93 51 9 5 H DISPLAY SCALE CHAHHEL 3 TOTAL 3 CHAHHEL 4 The view of the display with the DISPLAY SETUP list the TOTAL VALUES text highlighted path MENU DISPLAY DISP
149. e change of the displayed result is possible after pressing lt gt or lt Y gt The results on the display are in this case changed in the cycle i e CH1 PEAK gt CH1 MAX gt CH3 PEAK gt CH3 MIN gt CH4 PEAK gt CH4 MAX gt CH4 MIN gt CH4 RMS gt CH1 PEAK and so on VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer the change of the result after pressing lt gt or lt Y gt The spectra are registered in the file s buffer with the same step as selected in the BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETUP sub list In order to display the registered spectra the user has to press lt Altf gt together with lt gt for the spectra stored later and to press lt Altf gt together with lt 4 gt for the spectra saved earlier The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the change of the spectra after pressing lt SHIFT gt together with lt 4 gt or lt gt gt In the file of the buffer containing the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis also the time history for each filter is stored The user can observe these values by pressing lt ENTER gt The next pressing of lt ENTER gt or lt ESC gt causes the return to the displaying of spectrum The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the change between spectrum and time history after pressing lt ENTER gt The user can observ
150. e BUF STEP is set greater than or equal to 1 second and every second when the BUF STEP is set less than 1 second The displays in the PLOT presentation mode the overview of the values later stored in the buffer METRIC units and LINear scale settings selected The displays in the PLOT presentation mode the overview of the values later stored in the buffer NON METRIC units and LINear scale setting selected After finishing the registration it is possible to overview all saved results For this reason the cursor has to be placed to the left or right limit of the presentation Each press of lt 4 gt or lt gt results in the respective earlier or later value being dispayed The whole time history display is shifted one position to the right or left The displays in the PLOT presentation mode the overview of the values earlier stored in the buffer LOGarithmic scale setting selected The displays in the PLOT presentation mode the overview of the values earlier stored in the buffer METRIC units and LINear scale setting selected If a selected result is saved in each channel to view time history in all profiles the user has to press lt gt and lt Y gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The displays in the PLOT mode changing the profile METRIC units and LINear scale setting selected In the PLOT mode it is possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis using lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt
151. e EXT I O SETUP sub list path MENU SETUP EXT I O SETUP enables the user to select the output or input device The additional output socket called AC Int enables one to connect the VI 400Pro with another device On this socket the signal from the input or output of the analog to digital converter before the correction is available This signal can be registered using a magnetic recorder observed on an oscilloscope or used as a trigger measurement It is possible to connect three types of input output devices ANALOG DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT This position enables the user to set the proper external device In order to enter this position the user has to select the EXT I O SETUP text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt 14 00 USER FILTERS STAT LEVELS 4 The view of the display in the SETUP list in sound measurements the EXT I O SETUP text highlighted In the MODE position of EXT I O SETUP sub list three options are available ANALOG DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT In order to select the external device user has to press the lt 4 gt lt gt push buttons The position is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the lt ENTER gt with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt push button ignoring a change made in the position 14 18 14 18 14 18 Eat I 70 SETUP Eat IO SETUP Eat IO SETUP MODE
152. e PEAK for the microphone sensitivity 50 mV Pa RANGE Max PEAK value 105 dB 118 dB A weighting 105 dB 118 dB C weighting 105 dB 118 dB LIN weighting 130 dB 140 dB A weighting 130 dB 140 dB C weighting 130 dB 140 dB LIN weighting Notice For the signals with the crest factor n gt 1 41 upper measuring range of the RMS LEQ and SPL is reduced The valid upper limit can be calculated according to the below given formula A 137 20 log n 2 m where A is the upper limit for the sinusoidal signal Example For the crest factor n 10 the upper limit is A o 120 dB Measuring frequency range of the acoustic pressure 3 dB 10 Hz to 20 000 Hz Basic measurement error of the acoustic pressure lt 0 7 dB measured for the reference conditions see below Vl 400Pro User Manual Weighting filters see appendix D e LIN meeting requirements of the IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 Z filter eA meeting requirements of the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 A filter C meeting requirements of the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 C filter RMS detector e Digital True RMS with PEAK detection e Resolution 0 1 dB e Range 999 9 dB e Crest Factor unlimited for signals in 20 kHz band Time weighting characteristics e S SLOW according to IEC 651 Type 1 e F FAST according to IEC 651 Type 1 e
153. e any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press lt ESC gt 5 37 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Saving files in the instrument s memory SAVE and SAVE NEXT The SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE position is used for storing data in the internal non volatile FLASH DISC memory as a file a complete list of file formats is available upon request In order to enter this position the user has to select the SAVE text in the FILE list using lt gt lt gt or lt 1 gt lt gt After the selection lt ENTER gt must be pressed The additional function for saving results the SAVE NEXT save a file with the name increased by one is available after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt LOAD DELETE The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the SAVE text highlighted displayed inversely The additional function for results saving the SAVE NEXT save a file with the name increased by one is available after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the FILE sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt i The view of the displays with the SAVE position opened The name of the file in which the measurements or the analysis results are to be saved is displayed under the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text The default name for a file is displayed the first time this position is entered after power on and the last saved file s name is displayed the next time this position is entered It is possible
154. e displays with the AXIS CHANNEL path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE AXIS SETUP some position selected A Notice It is not possible to set the axis channel of the measurements during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not highlighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the axis channel the measurement must be finished The view of the displays with AXIS CHANNEL position not accessible If the user assigns any wrong axis of accelerometer not corresponding to the number of channels it appears on the display the text INCORRECT SETUP VIB DOSE IS OFF and dose measurements will not be done Otherwise the measurement will be continued VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 24 IHCORFECT SETUP WIE BOSE IS OFF PRESS AHY KEY The view of the displays informed about wrong selected setting Selection of the standards of vibration dose STANDARDS The STANDARDS path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE STANDARDS position enables the user to select the standard used for the measurement of vibration dose The selected standard determines the limits of measured vibration VI 400Pro firmware version 2 17 has UNITED KINGDOM U K ITALY and POLAND standards available these positions can not be accessed and changed Those positions ps about the limits of vib
155. e reaction from the user The user should then press lt ESC gt lt ENTER gt or lt START STOP gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The same information as in the LOAD position about the existing files in the instrument are displayed after opening CATALOGUE position In the consecutive lines of the display the current file number the total number of the files the file name the file type date and time of registration are presented The change of the current file with the unit step can be done pressing lt 4 gt lt gt After pressing lt SHIFT gt with lt 4 gt the first file is available and after pressing lt SHIFT gt with lt gt the last one is displayed The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt 11 35 11 35 HO FILES FILE 173 FILE 373 g6 MAY 15 55 22 12 MAY 15 51 28 11 57 11 58 FILE 39 FILE 479 16 JUN 15 03 16 17 JUN 8 44 59 The view of the displays during the execution of the CATALOGUE operation Checking the free space in the memory FREE SPACE The FREE SPACE path MENU FILE FREE SPACE position is used to read out the free space in the FLASH DISC memory of the instrument In order to enter this position the user has to select highlight the FREE SPACE text in the FILE list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the FREE SPACE text highlighted The number of avai
156. e selected by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt to change to VIBR mode and press lt ENTER gt which accepts the change and closes the MODE sub list Pressing lt ESC gt closes the MODE sub list ignoring any changes made in it The view of the displays in the CHANNEL x path MENU INPUT list with the CHANNEL x text selected a the SOUND METER mode selected b and the VIBR METER mode selected c In 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the spectrum is available in parallel to the VLM operation All 45 digital pass band filters with the center frequencies from 20 kHz down to 0 8 Hz in base two system are working in the real time with the HP weighting filter displayed in the SPECTRUM sub list of the CHANNELS SETUP sub list and the linear RMS detector In order to inform the user about the working mode of the instrument in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes the doted lines are used for the indication that the instrument is not in the VLM mode In the VLM mode solid lines are used 1 66mm The view of the displays in One profile and 3 PROFILES display mode with the doted lines indicating that the instrument is not in the VLM mode A Notice The TOTAL RMS result is measured with the HP weighting filter and takes no account of the VLM profile settings The spectra are always linearly averaged Thus the TOTAL value from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can differ from those obtained in the VLM profiles if the RMS INTEGRATION is set to EXPONENTIAL I
157. e the time history plot on the output of each octave or third octave filter as well as for the whole band TOTAL value For sound measurements the TOTAL values depend on the USER FILTERS setting in the SETUP list If those filters are not active switched to Off three TOTAL values are displayed which were calculated with the A C and LIN filters respectively When those filters are active only one TOTAL calculated with the A filter is displayed together with the value calculated for SUSR1 and SUSR2 filters When only one filter is active on the display TOTAL A TOTAL C SUSR2 or TOTAL A SUSR1 TOTAL LIN are presented depending on which filter is active Additionally the view presented in the BUFFER VIEW depends on the selected MODE The SUSR1 and SUSR2 values are available only when SOUND METER is chosen When the user wants to observe the sound measurements saved in the buffer but the VIBR METER is selected all three TOTAL values calculated with the A C and LIN filters are displayed in the BUFFER VIEW VI 400PRO USER MANUA The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the TOTAL values and their time histories Settings of the meter DISPLAY SCALE LOGarithmic path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LOG TOTAL 1 HP path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 CH HP1 path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALU
158. ected channel is made by pressing just lt 4 gt or lt gt gt To change the nn in statistical level the user has to press lt gt with lt 4 gt or lt gt gt in one profile or 3 PROFILES display mode By pressing lt gt or lt Y gt the user can switch the display mode to One profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS PLOT from the channel the results of the measurement were stored the number of the channel is displayed along with the name of the result i e CH 1 PEAK CH 2 RMS CH 3 MAX etc A Notice The user can select the currently active display mode by means of the DISPLAY MODES sub list of the DISPLAY list The activation of a mode is indicated by the graphical symbol placed in the proper line of the DISPLAY MODES sub list More details about the display modes are given in the description of the DISPLAY list in the Chapter 5 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL SPECTRUM o PROFILE STATISTICS PLOT The view of the displays with the DISPLAY MODES path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES sub list opened 3 PROFILE STATISTICS and PLOT checked on a and only PLOT checked on b One profile mode of measurement results presentation This is the main mode of presentation and can not be switched off In One profile mode the selected result is presented in the middle of the display in easily visible format The length of the horizontal bar graph placed under the digital value corresponds to the measur
159. ection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal 4 39 4 40 4 43 4 58 4 59 4 62 4 63 4 65 4 65 4 5 2 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer of vibration signal 4 68 Measurement range selection in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal RANGE 4 75 Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s 4 76 file BUFFERS SETUP Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis parameters for vibration signal SPECTRUM 4 77 Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s 4 78 file BUFFER Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 3 OCTAVE 4 78 analysis of vibration signal 4 6 DOSE ANALYZER FOR FUTURE USE 5 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS 5 1 5 1 DATA AVAILABLE ON THE SCREEN DISPLAY LIST 5 1 Selection of the modes of measurement results presentation DISPLAY MODES 5 1 Selection of the parameters in graphical results presentation DISPLAY SETUP 5 3 Setting of the scale in graphical results presentation DISPLAY SCALE 5 4 Scaling of the vertical axis of the graphical presentation DYNAMIC 5 4 Scaling of the horizontal axis of the graphical presentation X ZOOM 5 4 Selection of the weighted filters TOTAL VALUES 5 5 Selection of the weighted filters for the 1 profile TOTAL 1 5 5 Selection of the weighted filters for the 2 profile TOTAL 2 5 6 Selection of the weighted filters for the 3 p
160. ed result If the level of the measured signal is too small the UNDERRANGE text is displayed in the place of the horizontal bar graph This text disappears after stopping the measurement using lt START STOP gt or lt PAUSE gt In this mode the parameters channel number displayed value weighting filter with units and RMS detector type are presented in four lines on the right side of the display A vertical line separates the digital value from the parameters This vertical line is solid for sound level meter mode and doted in other modes The PEAK result never depends on the detector time constant so the fourth line for this result always remains empty The LEQ SEL and Ld en results depend on the detector time constant if the EXPONENTIAL option of the RMS INTEGRATION position of the SETUP list is selected 9 4 CH_3 T LER dB A SS ES SS SS The view of the displays in one profile presentation switching between the results in a channel In this One Profile mode of presentation switching between the simultaneously calculated results is performed by means of lt 4 gt or lt gt The view of the displays in one profile presentation switching between the results in a channel After consecutively pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt the LEQ SEL Ld en Ltm3 Ltm5 LN PEAK MAX MIN and SPL results are presented on displays as shown in the figures above In this One Profile mode of presentation switching between the simul
161. eighting filters only for the vibration level meter e W Bxy from 1 Hz to 330 Hz with 6 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics e W Bz from 3 Hz to 1000 Hz with 6 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics e H A from 1 Hz to 330 Hz with 6 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics e W Bc from 3 Hz to 1000 Hz with 6 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics KB from 10 Hz to 3000 Hz with 6 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics e Wk from 1 Hz to 18 Hz with 12 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics Wd from 1 Hz to 18 Hz with 12 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics e Wc from 3 Hz to 57 Hz with 12 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics e Wj from 10 Hz to 181 Hz with 12 dB octave slope cf App D 2 for the filter characteristics Special filter Filter for the evaluation of the state of machines VelMF 10 Hz to 1000 Hz conforms to the ISO 10816 standard see appendix D 2 for the filter characteristic RMS detector Digital with 0 1 dB sampling step PEAK and P P detectors Digital with 0 1 dB sampling step Vl 400Pro User Manual C4 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro Display Graphical the liquid crystals LCD type with the backlight 97x32 pixels and icons Memory 32 MB flash memory and 96 kB of the RAM memory Flash memory d
162. election of the display mode is made by pressing lt gt or lt Y gt e Scrolling between channels is possible by pressing lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt in One profile 4 PROFILES or STATISTICS modes e Scrolling between the results of a selected channel is possible by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt in One profile or 3 PROFILES modes e Changing the statistics class statistics are only available for sound measurements the 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave filter the FFT line and the value in the buffer is done by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt which moves the cursor in STATISTICS SPECTRUM and PLOT modes e Pressing lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt allows the user to change the relation between the vertical and horizontal axis of results in the SPECTRUM and PLOT modes e For 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis mode of acoustic signals pressing lt ENTER gt in the SPECTRUM mode while viewing results allows the user to observe the statistical analysis performed for the selected 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filter To return to the SPECTRUM mode press lt ESC gt The statistical analysis is not performed for the vibration signal e While reviewing 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE statistical analysis results of the acoustic signals lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt 7 gt allows the user to change the selected 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filters Pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt changes the cursor po
163. end the coefficients of the filters used in the calculations by means of the serial interface from a PC contact Quest technologies for a list of remote commands The names of the filters introduced to the unit as mentioned above as well as the values of the coefficients can be examined by means of the VIEW window from the VIBR FILTERS sub list of the SETUP list path MENU SETUP USER FILTERS VIBR FILTERS VIEW ID Ie it LO CORRECTION The displays showing the possibility of the verification of the user filter names and the values of the coefficients used in the calculation of the TOTAL values presented in the SPECTRUM mode The second TOTAL value is measured with the weighting filter e selected in the second channel CH or e specified as VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or e which name and coefficients are sent to the instrument using the unit s serial interface and remote commands available from Quest Technologies upon request VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 10 24 TOTAL 2 F ILTER s FE CAL F F C i A AdE The view of the displays with the settings influencing the TOTAL values presented in the SPECTRUM mode in selected CHANNEL The third TOTAL value is measured with the weighting filter e selected in the third channel CH or e specified as VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or e which name and coefficients are sent to the instrument using the unit s serial interface and remote commands available from Quest Technologies upon request
164. ents fra 29 59 rra 23 59 SPL 911 606 A F etd ae ZLE0 Jig age C UNDERRANGE FAST MENENS ide F The view of the displays in SLM mode when the level of the signal is too low Table 3 1 The limits of the signal causing different icon indications during sound measurements VI 400PRO USER MANUAL SLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT ANALYSIS INDICATOR 130 dB range 105 dB range 130 dB range Bell 2 137 5 dB gt 114 5 dB gt 137 5 dB Y 3 Bars gt 130 1 dB gt 105 1 dB gt 130 1 dB 3 Bars 100 1 dB 130 0 dB 80 1 dB 105 0 dB 105 1 dB 130 0 dB 2 Bars 70 1 dB 100 0 dB 55 1 dB 80 0 dB 80 1 dB 105 0 dB 1 Bar 40 1 dB 70 0 dB 30 1 dB 55 0 dB 55 1 dB 80 0 dB lt 40 0 dB lt 30 0 dB lt 55 0 dB UNDERRANGE lt 240dBA lt 24 0 dB A lt 44 0 dB A UNDERRANGE lt 24 0 dB C lt 24 0 dB C lt 42 0 dB C UNDERRANGE lt 30 0 dB lt 30 0 dB lt 48 0 dB Table 3 2 The limits of the signal causing different icon indications during vibration measurements values expressed in decibels are calculated with the assumption that the reference level is equal to 1 um s VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT ANALYSIS INDICATOR 17 8 m s range 316 m s range 145 dB range 170 dB range ae gt 53 1 m s gt 750 m s gt 154 5 dB gt 177 5 dB ee gt 18 0 m s gt 320 m s pera gt 145 1 dB
165. erging DEFRAGMENTATION 5 47 Removing all files with results from buffer s memory CLEAR BUFFER 5 48 Checking the contents of the memory CATALOGUE 5 49 Checking the free space in the memory FREE SPACE 5 50 Saving setup in the instrument s memory SAVE SETUP and SAVE NEXT SETUP 5 51 Loading the files with the configuration LOAD SETUP 5 53 Operations in buffer 5 56 5 4 CALCULATION OF THE DOSE PARAMETERS AUX FUNCTIONS 5 58 Selection of the calculation results HAV CALCULATOR 5 58 Selection of the file with results of measurement RESULT SEL 5 59 Selection of the partial results PARTIAL EAV ELV 5 61 Selection of the partial exposure PARTIAL EXP 5 61 Selection of the daily exposure DAILY EXPOSURE 5 62 Selection of the calculation results WBV CALCULATOR 5 62 Selection of the file with results of measurement RESULT SEL 5 63 Selection of the partial results PARTIAL EAV ELV Selection of the partial exposure PARTIAL RESULTS Selection of the daily exposure DAILY RESULTS APPENDIX A For Future Use APPENDIX B For Future Use APPENDIX C DATA SPECIFICATION C 1 SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro AS SOUND LEVEL METER C 2 SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro AS 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE AND FFT SOUND ANALYZER C 3 SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro AS VIBRATION LEVEL METER ANALYZER C 3 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFICATION OF VI 400Pro APPENDIX D DEFINITIONS AND FILTER CHARACTERISTICS D 1 DEFINITIONS AND FORMULAE D 1 1
166. es REP CYCLE The REP CYCLE position defines the number of cycles with the measurement time defined in the INT TIME which should be performed by the instrument The parameter value can be set in steps of 1 using lt 4 gt lt gt gt or in steps of 20 using lt 4 gt lt gt with lt gt The selected value is accepted by pressing lt ENTER gt which closes the MEASURE SETUP sub list The Inf value denotes the infinite repetition of the measurements till the next pressing of the lt START STOP gt push button or by remote control code The REP CYCLE values choices are 1 to 1000 or Inf 9 99 10 00 10 0 START DELAY 1s START DELAY 1s q START_ DELAY 15 IHT TIME IHT TIME IHT TIME os z os 8s FEF CYCLE FEF CYCLE FEF CYCLE BUF STEP sq BUF STEF Ssq BUF STEF 5 The view of the displays setting the REP CYCLE path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP available number of cycles 1 to 1000 or Inf Setting time between two writings to the buffer s file BUF STEP The BUF STEP position defines the time period data is logged in the buffer s file It can be set to 10 20 50 100 200 500 milliseconds 1 to 59 seconds 1 to 59 minutes or 1 hour The parameter value can be set in units using lt 4 gt lt gt gt or in tens of units using lt Alt f gt with lt 4 gt lt gt gt and accepted by lt ENTER gt which simultaneously closes the MEASURE SETUP sub list Any changes are ignored a
167. essed in LINear path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LIN NON METRIC units path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS NON METRIC 12 50 l J DISPLAY SCALE ISPLAY SCALE SCALE _ E _ L G DYH Hoe AMIC oe a OOM ix 200M 1x The view of the displays with the different display scale LINear or LOGrithmic units selection SPECTRUM TYPE 4 71 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration velocity and displacement spectrum expressed in LOGarithmic units path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE LOG The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration spectrum expressed in LINear path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LIN NON METRIC units path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS NON METRIC The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration spectrum expressed in LOGarithmic units path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LOG The view of the displays path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES TOTAL x FILTER with the different weighting filters path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x which can influence the units of vibration results The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the acceleration spectrum expressed in LINear path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE
168. f the display the selected 1 3 octave filter center frequency or the selected TOTAL is given the units with the weighting filter dB A dB C or dB in the case of the LIN and the numerical value are displayed The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in the SPECTRUM display mode for CHANNEL 1 In One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes are presented in the same way as in the case of the SLM mode with only one difference that instead of the solid line the doted line is used The active channel is changed after each pressing of lt gt lt gt The change of the result from the same channel is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt push buttons The LN value is changed after pressing lt Alif gt and lt 4 gt or lt gt and lt gt gt push buttons The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes In the STATISTICS mode it is possible to select the LN value using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The active channel is presented on the left side of the display LN corresponding to the current position of the cursor is displayed in the second line of the right sight of the display value of LN in the third line and the units together with the indicator of the weighting filter in the fourth When the STATISTICS mode of result s presentation is entered lt gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt gt are used for this purpose in order to change the active channel lt gt
169. for the vibration measurements the acceleration signal in the frequency range from 3 5 Hz to 20 kHz dB EdB o o 10 id 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 14 0 32 4 125 256 512 1024 2048 4056 Hz 59 1 39 4 21 5 5 6 O 2 ora 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 dB The characteristics of the HP3 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the acceleration measurements VI 400Pro USER MANUAL The HP10 filter is used for the vibration measurements the acceleration signal in the frequency range from 10 Hz to 20 kHz 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 14 0 32 54 128 256 O12 1024 2048 4056 Hz f8 3 59 0 41 2 25 1 Li 2 1 9 O 1 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB The characteristics of the HP10 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the acceleration measurements The digital filters implemented in the vibration level meter VLM mode for the velocity measurements 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 Hz 37 3 20 0 16 8 21 9 25 0 34 0 40 0 45 1 52 1 58 1 54 1 70 1 76 2 852 2 58 1 dB The characteristics of the Vell digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the velocity measurements Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256
170. fter pressing lt ESC gt The view of the displays setting the BUF STEP path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP available values in a sequence 10 20 50 milliseconds Setting parameters in channels and for octave analysis CHANNELS SETUP The user enters the CHANNELS SETUP sub list after pressing lt ENTER gt on the high lighted displayed CHANNELS SETUP text For sound or vibration level meter mode this sub list consists of four CHANNEL x choices each for one channel CHANNEL 1 CHAHHEL 4 The view of the displays with the CHANNELS SETUP path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP sub list opened the selection of a channel VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Pressing lt ENTER gt opens the sub list for a high lighted channel x _ l5 CHAHHEL 1 MODE C2 RANG E MIC CORRECTION CHAHHEL 4 PROFILE 1 The view of the sub lists CHANNELS SETUP a and CHANNEL 2 b b Setting parameters in a channel CHANNEL x In the CHANNEL x sub list the following parameters can be programmed independently for each channel For VIBRATION MODE Range Weighting Filter and RMS detector type For SOUND MODE Range Mic Correction Profile 1 Profile 2 and Profile 3 Each of the three separate Profiles can be programmed independently for Weighting Filter and RMS Detector type Scrolling throughout the sub list is possible using lt gt lt Y gt The settings made in CHANNEL x sub list are different for sound measurements and vib
171. ge for the acceleration measurement 10 0 5 Hz 5 kHz in the linear measurements with the HP1 filter Notice With the application of another vibration transducer the frequency range given above for the HP1 filter can be different wider Basic error for the acceleration measurement lt 0 7 dB Instrument s pre heating time 1 minute Measurement channels calibration Direct by the measurement of the standard signal generated by the external vibration calibrator Digital by the declaration of the transducer s sensitivity Accelerometer inputs Connectors 1 x LEMO ENB OB 304 CLM pin plus 1 x TNC for auxiliary transducer Impedance each channel 40 kQ 100 pF typical Vibration transducers powering 28 V 2 5 mA current source Range of the measured voltage Lower level filter depended see below Upper level 7 5 Vams 137 dB related to 1 uVams or 177 dB related to 1 um s rms Internal noise level Wideband noise level measured with the voltage input short circuit 20 kHz band e with the HP1 filter lt 17 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the HP3 filter lt 17 Vrms see appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the HP10 filter lt 17 uVrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the W Bxy filter lt 3 Vrms see appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the W Bz filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter character
172. ghted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the PROFILES SETUP lists path MENU INPUT 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer and the SLM VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of the result which triggers registration in BUFFER mode in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal In level meter mode only the result coming from the RMS detector of channel one is used for triggering purposes In the case of vibration measurements it is VECT VEC SND or RMS value The SOURCE position is not accessible in that mode However in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis it is possible to access mentioned above position and to make a selection The results coming from the output of 1 3 OCTAVE filters starting from 125 Hz 125 Hz 160 Hz 200 Hz 250 Hz 315 Hz 400 Hz 500 Hz 630 Hz 800 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 25 kHz 1 60 kHz 2 00 kHz 2 50 kHz 3 15 kHz 4 00 kHz 5 00 kHz 6 30 kHz 8 00 kHz 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 16 0 kHz and 20 0 kHz are available as well as RMS result from the selected channel ET TRIGGER BUFFER SOURCE 14 32 14 42 BUFFER TRIGGER BUFFER H SOURCE i CHANHEL 1aade CEVEL 1606 4 4 7 19 14 33 TRIGGER BUFFER TRIGGER BUFFER_ TRIGGER BUFFER Es pray
173. h pass filter for 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis High pass filter LIN cut off frequency 27 0 Hz 0 1 dB 10 0 Hz 3 0 dB pass band ripple lt 0 1 dB roll off 6 dB octave 1 1 OCTAVE 15 filters with center frequencies from 1 Hz to 16 kHz base 2 meeting DIN 45651 IEC 1260 Annex B and ANSI S1 11 1986 for Type 1 1 3 OCTAVE 45 filters with center frequencies from 0 8 Hz to 20 kHz base 2 meeting DIN 45651 IEC 1260 Annex B and ANSI S1 11 1986 for Type 1 Vl 400Pro User Manual C 3 SPECIFICATIONS OF VI 400Pro AS VIBRATION LEVEL METER ANALYZER System Configuration e VI 400Pro e 072 026 Tri Axial HAV accelerometer System conforms to the ISO 8041 ISO 2631 1 ISO 5349 and ISO 10816 standards Measurement ranges for the acceleration 6 2 ranges with the nominal values 17 8 ms 2 316 ms 2 145 dB 170 dB related to 10 ms 2 Values of the measured acceleration e linear measurement with the HP1 filter the measurement ranges for the distance from noise gt 6 dB from 0 003 ms 2 to 596 ms 2 the sinusoidal signal RMS from 0 03 ms 2 to 798 ms 2 PEAK RANGE RMS Measurement ranges 17 8 ms 2 145 0 dB from 3 16 mms 2 70 0 dB to 56 2 ms 2 155 0 dB 316 ms 2 170 0 dB from 33 mms 2 90 0 dB to 1000 ms 2 180 0 dB e linear measurement with the HP3 filter the measurement ranges for the distance from noise gt 6 dB from 0 001 ms 2 to 596 ms 2 the sinusoidal signal RMS fro
174. he DEFRAGMENTATION operation appears see Fig c below while the state of the memory before the execution of this operation is given in Fig a below 10 05 FREE SPACE Bar 92 ee LE 10 04 10 03 DEFRAGMENTATION FREE SPACE 4112 bytes finished PRESS AHY KEY J TOTAL AWATLAGLE 6 TOTAL AWAILA S66 S664112 bytes 4117 bytes b c The view of the displays with the state of the file s memory a after completing the DEFRAGMENTATION operation b and the state of the memory after the successful execution of the operation c a Removing all files with results from buffer s memory CLEAR BUFFER The CLEAR BUFFER path MENU FILE CLEAR BUFFER position is used to delete the whole contents of the buffers memory of the instrument all files are erased It is not possible to leave any data in the buffer In order to enter this position the user has to select highlight the CLEAR BUFFER text in the FILE list using lt gt lt V gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt 10 4 LL MEHTATIOH 4 The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the CLEAR BUFFER text highlighted VI 400PRO USER MANUA The instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this position after pressing lt ENTER gt The next pressing of lt ENTER gt when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the position and the return to the FILE list The selection of the
175. he BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETUP sub list In order to display the spectra registered in the buffer s file the user has to press lt Altf gt and lt gt gt push buttons for the spectra stored later press lt Altf gt and lt 4 gt push buttons for the spectra saved earlier In the BUFFER VIEW sub list it is also possible to examine the time history for 1 3 OCTAVE filter selected by the cursor see the description of the BUFFER VIEW sub list in Chapter 5 A Notice Many time histories can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument during the measurements performed in different sessions The presentation of these results is possible using the BUFFER VIEW window of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY BUFFER VIEW see Chapter 5 Measurement range selection in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration signal RANGE The selection of the input range is possible after entering the RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE from the INPUT CHANNEL x sub list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The input ranges specified in Appendix C The return to the CHANNEL x sub list ignoring the changes is made after pressing lt ESC gt or confirming the selection after pressing lt ENTER gt BH FUNCT IOM MEASURE SETUP CHAHHEL 3 FILE OYPFFT SETUP OY CHAHHEL 4 The view of the displays with the RANGE path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE
176. he SPECTRUM mode The results of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis so called spectrum can be presented as the acceleration velocity or displacement spectrum The type of the spectrum is selected in the SPECTRUM TYPE window of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM TYPE ACCELERATION VELOCITY or DISPLACEMENT 10 5 DISPLAY SCALE TOTAL VALUES SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPELTRUM TPE OWACCELERATION UECOCITY The view of the displays with the settings influencing 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results presentation in the SPECTRUM mode The results of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis are always calculated and saved as the acceleration spectrum The ACC text given in the first left column indicates that the acceleration spectrum is presented on the display In order to present the velocity spectrum the linear accelerometer value from each 1 1 OCTAVE filter is divided by 2zf where f is the exact central frequency of the mentioned filter The VEL text is presented in the first column of the display in this case indicating the type of the spectrum In order to present the displacement spectrum the linear velocity value from each 1 1 OCTAVE filter is divided by 2rf where f is the exact central frequency of the mentioned filter The DIL text is given in the first column of the display in this case indicating the type of the spectrum The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis in the SPECTRUM display mode LINear path
177. he displays with the request for the confirmation for the CLEAR SETUP position execution a b and after the execution of the function c The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing any push button with an exception of the lt Altf gt one Selection of detector s type in the LEQ RMS calculations RMS INTEGRATION The RMS INTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION position enables the user to select the detector type for the calculations of the LEQ function for sound measurements or the RMS function for vibration measurements In order to enter this position the user has to select the RMS INTEGRATION text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The view of the display in the SETUP list with the RMS INTEGRATION text highlighted Two options are available LINEAR and EXPONENTIAL The required parameter can be selected using lt lt 4 gt lt gt The position is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ENTER gt with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt ignoring a change made in the position The expressions used for the LEQ or RMS calculations are given in Appendix D Setting LINEAR is required for the IEC 61672 1 standard for getting the true RMS value of the measured signal When this option is selected for sound measurements the value of the LEQ and SEL function
178. hecked More details about the display modes are given in the description of the DISPLAY list in the Chapter 5 a The view of the displays with the DISPLAY MODES sub list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES opened and active all display modes of vibration level mode a and some of the display modes switched off b One profile mode of measurement results presentation This is the main mode of presentation and can not be switched off In One profile mode the selected result is presented in the middle of the display in the easily visible format The length of the horizontal bar graph placed under the digital value corresponds to the measured result In this mode the parameters channel number displayed value and weighting filter with units are presented in four lines on the right side of the display A vertical line separates the digital value from the parameters This vertical line is solid for vibration level meter mode and doted in other modes The view of the displays in One profile mode switching among the results in a profile In this One Profile mode of presentation switching among the simultaneously calculated results is performed using lt 4 gt or lt gt After consecutively pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt the PEAK P P MTVV or MAX RMS and VDV results are presented on displays as shown in the figures above and below The view of the displays in One profile mode switching among the results in CHANNEL
179. his mode the instrument works in TRIGGER PULSE function This I O connection is especially important when the user wants to simultaneously measure the noise or vibration in more than 4 channels by using two VI 400Pro units These I O connections synchronize both instruments Selection of few push buttons mode SHIFT MODE The SHIFT MODE path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE sub list enables the user to program the operation mode of the lt Altf gt and lt START STOP gt push buttons The view of the display in the SETUP list the SHIFT MODE text highlighted In order to enter this position the user has to select the SHIFT MODE text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The selection of a parameter in both positions is done by means of lt 4 gt lt gt gt and confirmed by pressing lt ENTER gt Selection of the working mode of lt Ali gt push button SHIFT In the SHIFT path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE position the user can choose between Shift and 2nd Fun When the Shift text is selected the lt Altf gt push button operates as in the keyboard of a computer in order to achieve the desired result the second push button has to be pushed simultaneously with the lt Altf gt push button When the 2nd Fun text is selected the lt Alif gt push button operates in sequence with the other push button lt Altf gt must be pressed and released and then the second push but
180. ibration measurements CH VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other sent to the unit by means of the serial interface The view of the displays with the TOTAL 2 list opened in the case of vibration measurements TYPE position available only for vibration measurements available values if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the previous position ACC VEL and DIL if the CH filter was selected the filter which was set in the 2 channel this position is not displayed CAL F position available only for vibration measurements accessible if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position if the CH filter was selected the filter which was set in the 2 channel this position is not displayed available values from 60 0dB to 60 0dB with 0 1dB step by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt or with 1 dB step by pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt gt Selection of the Weighted Filters for the 3 profile TOTAL 3 The TOTAL 3 sub list enables one to select the weighted filter to be used for the calculation of the TOTAL value in the third profile FILTER its type TYPE and the calibration coefficient CAL F The TOTAL 3 sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the TOTAL VALUES list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or the lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes VI 400PRO USER MANUA FILTER position available values of the weighted filters
181. iew set and clear the correcting values for all 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave filters e STAT LEVELS position is available only in the case of sound measurements e EXT I O SETUP position enables to connect meter with other device e SHIFT MODE sub list which enables the user to set the operating mode of the lt gt push button e CLEAR SETUP position which enables the user to return to the manufactures s set up except for the coefficients set e RMS INTEGRATION position which enables the user to select the way of integration for the LEQ SEL and Ld en measurements for sound and the RMS measurement for vibration e REFERENCE LEVEL position which enables the user to select the reference level for the vibration measurements and which informs the user about the reference level in the sound measurements e VIBRATION UNITS position which enables the user to select the vibration units in which the results of the measurements are to be given e WARNINGS sub list which enables the user to switch on or off the warnings which can be displayed during the operation of the instrument e VECTOR DEF sub list which enables the user to select coefficient needed to calculate vibration vector which is taken into account during the calculations of the measurement results e HAV WBV DOSE sub list which enables the user to select parameters presenting the EXPOSURE and VIBRATION DOSE measurements e MENU LOCK sub list which enables the use
182. ighted In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press lt ESC gt 12 49 a PARTIAL Ear DAILY EXPOSURE The view of the displays with the HAV CALCULATOR sub list Selection of the file with result of measurement RESULT SEL The RESULT SEL position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR RESULTS SEL is used to load data file from the FLASH DISC The user selects which files of measurement should be used to determine results of measurements It is possible to select 6 files which include measurement s results with H A data The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the RESULTS SEL text in the HAV CALCULATOR list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the AUX FUNCTIONS list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt 12 44 A PARTIAL Ear DAILY EXPOSURE The view of the display in the HAV CALCULATOR sub list the RESULT SEL text highlighted After pressing lt ENTER gt the position is closed and the instrument opens a new sub list It consists of six positions The user can review the list using lt gt lt Y gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and select a position after pressing lt ENTER gt EMPTY EMPTY The view of the display in the RESUL
183. ile User can switch OFF or ON BUFFERS position by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing lt ESC gt 13 04 13 04 13 04 MEASURE SETUP BUFFERS Pe alae BUFFERS ae CHAHHELS SETUP CHAHHEL 1 tae CHAHHEL 1 fers CHAHHEL 2 wean CHAHHEL 2 waaae A CHAHHEL 3 Fama ffCHAHHEL 3 Fama at The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list list path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP the selection of the BUFFERS store The user can select the following results which can be saved PEAK P P MAX and RMS in the case of vibration measurement The selection of the parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list is made by pressing lt gt lt Y gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing lt ESC gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL In order to switch parameters in the buffer the user has to place special character in the chosen position available values are V or The selection of the required buffers parameter is made with lt 41 gt lt gt The user can pass to the selection of the next parameter in the CHANNEL x sub list pressing lt gt lt V gt After pressing
184. ilter Reference range 170 dB Level indication range from 100 dB to 10 2 dB related to the nominal range level Vl 400Pro User Manual Basic accuracy lt 0 2 dB for the temperature T 23 C 5 C for sinusoidal signal 140 dB rusin the band 10 Hz 20 kHz with the HP10 input filter Measurement error in the full temperature range lt 0 3 dB when the temperature is from 10 C to 50 C for the sinusoidal signal 140 dB rms in the band 10 Hz 20 kHz with the HP10 input filter Input divider accuracy 0 1 dB Amplitude indication stability 0 1 dB Accuracy and stability of the frequency indication 0 01 Digital filters Low pass filters 8 eighth order elliptic filters with the cut off frequencies from 10 kHz to 78 125 Hz in the binary sequence Ripple in the pass band 0 1 dB Attenuation in the stop band gt 100 dB High pass filters only for the vibration level meter HP1 filter see appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics HP3 filter see appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics HP10 filter see appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics 1 1 OCTAVE filters 15 sixth order elliptic filters with the center frequencies from 1 Hz to 16 kHz conforming to the DIN 45651 IEC 1260 Type 1 and ANSI S1 11 1986 standards 1 3 OCTAVE filters 45 sixth order elliptic filters with the center frequencies from 0 8 Hz to 20 kHz conforming to the DIN 45651 IEC 1260 Type 1 and ANSI S1 11 1986 standards W
185. ing the BUFFER VIEW window of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY BUFFER VIEW see Chapter 5 1 1 OCTAVE analysis can be performed taking into account the USER FILTERS coefficients set in the SETUP list path MENU SETUP USER FILTERS SOUND FILTERS VIBR FILTERS VIEW EDIT CLEAR see Chapter 5 for detailed description of the USER FILTERS setting 10 43 10 43 10 43 EF VIER FILTERS LO CORRECT IOH TIH RTC ETE The view of the displays in the coefficient values setting of 1 3 or 1 1 OCTAVE filters in the USER FILTERS sub list of the SETUP list When these filters are switched on 1 1 OCTAVE analysis is performed in the normal way but simultaneously the USER FILTERS coefficients are taken into account for the calculation of the TOTAL result The TOTAL results for the first the second or for both USER FILTERS are presented instead of the TOTAL for A C and LIN weighting filters The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis with the switched on USER FILTERS for CHANNEL 2 Selection of the measurement range in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal RANGE The selection of the input range is possible after entering the RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE from the INPUT CHANNEL x sub list using lt gt lt V gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The input ranges are specified in Appendix C The return to the CHANNEL x sub list is made ignoring the changes after pressing
186. ing the SPECTRUM sub list one can select in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the weighting filter and the result which has to be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument The user can select it for every CHANNEL separately User can switch OFF or ON SPECTRUM position in selected channels by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt also returns to the INPUT sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list 14 18 MEASURE SETUP CHAHHELS SETUP BUFFERS SETUP The view of the displays in the INPUT sub list path MENU INPUT 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM with the SPECTRUM sub list in 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer The view of the displays in the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP sub list with the SPECTRUM sub list Selection of the weighting filter in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal FILTER position The following weighting filters are available in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis A type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards C type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards LIN conforms to the requirements for the Z filter of type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard HP high pass filter for 1 3 OCTAVE analysis VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 13 42 13 42 SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM FILTER FILTER ii FILTER BUFFER Horne BUFFER Horne BUFFER The view of the displays with the SPECTRUM sub list path MEN
187. ing this PLOT mode see Figure below When the BUFFERS positon is selected as non active BUFFER OFF and it is set for all channels the PLOT mode screen of displayed results is skipped all together together The view of the display in the PLOT mode when there is nothing in the buffer to be displayed after setting PLOT as active In the PLOT mode the results logged in the buffer file are also given on the display in time history form Each line corresponds to one measurement result the results are registered with the step set in the BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP There are 57 lines presented on the display with the dynamics not greater than 80 dB VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The read out of the desired value can be done using the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt or lt gt gt The selected channel s number is presented on the left side of the display Time of the measurement and the measured result with its unit are presented on the right side of the display Each new measurement result saved in the buffer file during the PLOT mode shifts the cursor position to the right When the cursor reaches the right limit of the display new measurement results appears on the right end of the display and the results from 58 BUF STEP disappears on the left end of the display This gives the appearance of the presentation moving to the left The display is updated every BUF STEP time when th
188. ings for channels e the marker of the end of the file The other elements of the file structure depend on the type of the file SLM VLM 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis buffer and on the setting of SAVE STAT position from SAVE OPTIONS sub list of the FILE list These elements are as follows e the main results e the results coming from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis e the results coming from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e the statistics header e the results of statistical analysis e the header of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e the results of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e the header of the buffer s file e the data stored during the measurements in the files of the buffer A Notice The detailed description of all types of file structures is available upon request VI 400PRO USER MANUA Selection of the file s operation FILE Storing the sound measurement results as files in the instrument s FLASH DISC can be done by means of the FILE list In order to open this list the user has to e press lt MENU e select highlight the FILE text from the main list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt e press lt ENTER gt The view of the display in the main list the FILE text highlighted The FILE list contains the following items SAVE enables one to save the measurement results as a file in the instrument memory SAV
189. irm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press lt ESC gt Selection of the parameters of vibration dose MEASURE DOSE In the EXPOSURE TIME position path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE MEASURE DOSE there are two possibilities the user can switch on ENABLED or switch off DISABLED the measurement of vibration dose If the user selects ENABLED in MEASURE DOSE he should also select the correct filter in INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x If an incorrect filter is chosen the display will show the message INCORRECT SETUP VIB DOSE IS OFF and dose measurements are not done Otherwise the measurement is continued 4 24 IHCORFECT SETUP UIE BOSE IS OFF PRESS AHY KEY The view of the display informing about wrong selected setting The measure MEASURE DOSE can be switched on or off using lt 4 gt lt gt gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has to be pressed which closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored MEASURE DOSE iae er DOSE 1H The view of the displays in the MEASURE DOSE window the selection of setting Selection of the parameters of vibration dose EXPOSURE TIME In the EXPOSURE TIME position path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE EXPOSURE TIME the user can set the expos
190. is made with lt 41 gt lt gt The user can pass to the selection of the next parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list pressing lt gt lt V gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list l3 FE BUFFERS i OFF CHANNEL 3 2 4 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 1 sub list the selection of the parameters to be saved in the buffer s file 4 76 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list the all the parameters were selected to be saved in the buffer s file in CHANNEL 1 and 2 vibration and in CHANNEL 3 and 4 sound parameters A Notice The change of the channels parameters is not possible when the measurement is performed The user has to finish the current measurement A Notice Setting BUFFER OFF results in bypassing the storing of the given channel s results in the buffer s file It creates more space in the buffer for other channels see Chapter 5 for details A Notice The buffer is updated in the time periods steps defined in the BUF STEP path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP The way the measurement results are stored is described in Chapter 5 Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis parameters for vibration signal SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT 1 3 OCTAVE
191. is the result which has to be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument B55 6 55 11 59 MEASURE SETUP SPECTRUM CHAHHELS SETUP CHAHHE BUFFER Horne BUFFERS SETUP CHAHHEL 3 OFF Fee LS CHAWHEL 4 OFF The view of the displays in the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP window with the SPECTRUM text selected in CHANNEL x position VI 400PRO USER MANUAL User can switch OFF or ON SPECTRUM position in selected channels by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the INPUT sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result of vibration signal to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER The RMS result from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument The selection of the required result is made with the lt 4 gt lt gt gt push buttons The selection of the None text means that the RMS results are not saved in the buffer s file The user causes the return to the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x sub list pressing the lt ENTER gt push button with the confirmation of the selections made in the sub list The return to the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x sub list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but all changes are in this case ignored The view of the displays in the SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT PROFILES SETUP 1 1 O
192. ist the selection of the parameters to be saved in the buffer s file CHANMEL 4 45 4 The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list four parameters were selected to be saved in the buffer s file in CHANNEL 1 2 3 and 4 The values of VECTOR can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument s VLM mode The user can switch the VECTOR position OFF or ON by pressing the lt 4 gt or lt gt push buttons Pressing lt ENTER gt confirms any changes made in the sub list and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt ignores any changes made in the sub list and returns to the INPUT sub list 4 31 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 13 29 MEASURE SETUP CHAHHELS SETUP The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP the selection of the VECTOR store A Notice Changing the channels parameters is not possible while a measurement is performed The user must finish the current measurement A Notice Setting BUFFER OFF results in those items not being stored in the buffer s file This creates more space in the buffer for other channels see Chapter 5 for details A Notice The buffer is updated in the time periods steps defined in the BUF STEP path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP The way the measurement results are stored is described in Chapter 5 Selection of mode and triggering parameters TRIGGER SETUP The TRIGGER SETUP sub list is opened
193. ist 5 38 SAVE NEXT Saving configuration in the memory with the name s modification position of 5 51 FILE list SAVE OPTIONS Controlling of the data storing in the instrument s memory sub list of FILE list 5 41 SAVE STAT Controlling of the statistics savings position of SAVE OPTIONS sub list 5 42 SAVE Saving files in the instrument s memory position of FILE list 5 38 SAVE Saving the configuration of the instrument in the instrument s memory position of FILE SETUP list 5 38 SCALE Setting the scale for vibration measurements position of DISPLAY SCALE 5 4 sub list SETUP Settings of the instrument s parameters main list function of the push button 5 16 SHIFT MODE Selection of few push buttons mode sub list of SETUP list 5 24 SHIFT Selection of the working mode of lt SHIFT gt push button position of 5 24 SHIFT MODE sub list SOURCE Selection of the triggering signal position of TRIGGER SETUP sub list 4 32 SPECTRUM Measurement results presentation mode graphical position of DISPLAY sub list 5 2 SPECTRUM Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis parameters sub list of PROFILES SETUP sub list 4 65 SPECTRUM Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis parameters sub list of PROFILES SETUP sub list 4 77 ST SP Selection of the working mode of lt START STOP gt push button position of SHIFT MODE sub list 5 25 STANDARD Selection of the STANDARD of the measurement of vibration dose sub list of HAV WBV DOSE list 5 34 START DELAY Setting sta
194. istics e with the H A filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the W Bc filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the KB filter lt 85 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the Wk filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the Wd filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the We filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the Wj filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristics e with the VeIMF filter lt 3 Vrms See appendix D 2 for the filter characteristic Maximum input voltage F n The VI 400Pro is the instrument with the 2 security class according to the international standard IEC 348 The input voltage should be within the range from 0 V to 28 V Crosstalk between channels lt 80 dB 1 kHz Overload detection The instrument has the built in overload detectors The overload in each of four measurement channels in analog part and in their analog to digital converters are independently detected Antialiasing filters Pass band 1 dB 24 2 kHz Stop band 27 1 kHz Attenuation in the stop band gt 70 dB Sampling frequency internal 51 2 kHz Analog Digital conversion 2x20 bits resolution Total linearity error from 0 dB to 90 dB below the full scale lt 0 5 dB 170 dB range with the HP10 f
195. ivided between buffer for the registration of the time history and spectra about 60 of the installed memory FLASH disk for storing the measurement data files about 30 of the installed memory Signal input Channel 4 The input of the measured signal taken from the microphone preamplifier or the vibration transducer TNC connector external view Signal input Channels 1 3 The input of the measured signal taken from the microphone preamplifiers or the vibration transducers LEMO type ENB OB 304 compatible socket external view Signal ground for channels 1 3 Ground connected to Snieg pin number 4 Vl 400Pro User Manual Power supply Ext Power Instrument is dedicated for the operation from the internal replaceable battery Instrument autonomy is operating mode depending Power consumption from 6 V source is as follows Meter Mode lt 160mA 6V at 20 C ANALYZER Mode lt 200mA 6V at 20 C Typical operating time from 4 x AA alkaline batteries ensures will be about 10 hours and 8 hours respectively For the temperatures below 0 C operating time can decrees depending on the batteries Instrument can be also powered from the external source e g SA 17A or car battery with the DC Voltage from 6 V to 24 V connected to Ext Power socket The red color indicator named as EXT POWER and placed on the bottom of instrument s keyboard should light after connecting the external power source
196. ks to be deleted During this wait time the instrument recovers the memory which was used by saved files and then clears it ALL FILES Deleted O K PRESS AHY KEY Fete Wait a 53 b The view of the display during the DELETE ALL operation a and after all files are deleted b a The above message see above FIG b is displayed after the successful execution of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed and after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list Memory merging DEFRAGMENTATION The DEFRAGMENTATION path MENU FILE DEFREGMENTATION position is used to merge the blocks of the memory which were released after the delete operation In order to enter this position the user has to select the DEFRAGMENTATION text in the FILE list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 1 gt lt gt and press lt ENTER gt DELETE DELETE ALL The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the DEFRAGMENTATION text highlighted The instrument requests the confirmation from the operation after entering this position after pressing lt ENTER gt The next pressing of lt ENTER gt when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the position and the return to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using lt 4 gt lt gt The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt E
197. l digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the displacement measurements Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 Hz saart 6a 1 56 6 45 3 5 1 68 0 8O0 L 32 1 104 2 1Ll 6 2 1258 3 140 3dB The characteristics of the Dil3 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the displacement measurements dB dE 1 0 2 0 4 0 3 0 146 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 Hz 96 5 84 3 ral 70 3 80 1 952 1 104 2 il6 2 1285 3 140 3 152 4 164 5dB The characteristics of the Dil10 digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode for the displacement measurements VI 400Pro USER MANUAL The digital filters included in the HUMAN VIBRATION OPTION The W Bxy filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the horizontal direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1990 07 15 standards dE dB a a 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 g0 g0 70 70 80 80 30 30 0 13 0 25 0 50 1024 Hz 395 2 20 9 7 5 35 3 dB The characteristics of the W Bxy digital filter implemented in the VI 400Pro instrument in the VLM mode The W Bz filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the vertical direction It conforms
198. l in Appendix C VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The additional input output socket AC Int the left one in the Fig above is a 1 pin LEMO compatible socket type ERN 00 250 The function of this AC Int socket can be selected from menu path MENU SETUP EXT I O SETUP MODE The socket can be used as e analog output with the signal from the input of the analog digital converter before correction this signal can be registered using magnetic recorder or observed on the oscilloscope the ANALOG setting e digital input for external interrupt the DIGITAL IN setting e digital output for external trigger the DIGITAL OUT setting The Ext Power socket the right one in the Fig above located on the bottom cover of the instrument is a Marushin MJ 14 compatible socket dedicated for the standard 5 5 2 1 mm plug The user can connect the external AC adapter 110 V 230 V which furnishes the proper DC level The instrument can be charged from the external DC source from 6 V to 24 V A Notice Switch the power off before connecting the instrument to any other device e g a printer or a Personal Computer The view of the front panel of the VI 400PRO instrument VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Chanm Chanmais 4 1 3 Quest Technologies ine VOP TO mi panes hc yc E Ea Type ti I OH EH E Ci E Ca i bo isei mna IEC 12E HE B a St Rae da AA Botterion r baie t na EeiPer Ue acing The view of the rear pa
199. lable space depends on the memory option installed in the unit and the history of the measurements The position is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing lt ENTER gt or lt ESC gt or after starting contining the measurements using the lt PROCEED gt or lt START STOP gt push buttons rva 23 59 rva 23 59 PACE SPACE S669988 bytes 162352425 bytes The view of the displays during the execution of the FREE SPACE operation in the units with 8 MB a and 32 MB of internal memory b VI 400PRO USER MANUA Saving setup in the instrument s memory SAVE SETUP and SAVE NEXT SETUP The SAVE SETUP path MENU FILE SAVE SETUP position is used for storing data in the FLASH DISC memory of the instrument as a file file formats are available upon request In order to enter this position the user has to select highlight the SAVE text in the FILE list using lt gt or lt 4 gt After the selection lt ENTER gt must be pressed The additional function for saving a setup the SAVE NEXT save a setup with the name increased by one is available after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the SAVE SETUP text highlighted The additional function for saving a setup the SAVE NEXT save a setup with the name increased by one is available after pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the FILE sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt
200. lated to 20 Pa e Reference frequency 1000 Hz e Reference temperature 20 C e Reference relative humidity 65 e Reference static pressure 1 013 kPa e Reference incidence direction perpendicular to the microphone diaphragm Calibration Acoustical with the QC 20 acoustic calibrator or equivalent Calibration level 114 0 dB Warm up time 1 min for 0 1 dB accuracy Effect of humidity lt 0 5 dB for 30 lt RH lt 90 at 40 C amp 1000 Hz Effect of magnetic field lt 15 dB A or lt 25 dB LIN for 80 A m and 50 Hz Effect of temperature lt 0 5 dB from 10 C to 50 C Operating range from 10 C to 50 C Storage from 20 C to 60 C 2 Effect of Vibration lt 71 dB from 20 Hz to 1000 Hz at 1 m s Additional functions Overload indication Underrange indication Battery state indication Noise levels measured with the microphone equivalent impedance 18 pF e LIN weighting lt 11 VRMS e A weighting lt 6 VRMS e C weighting lt 6 VRMS Vl 400Pro User Manual Antialiasing filter Built in antialiasing filter ensuring correct sampling of the measured signal Sampling frequency 51 2 kHz internal only Analog to digital converter 2 x 20 bit Reference range 130 dB Input attenuator accuracy for f 1 kHz and T 23 C 0 1 dB Internal oscillator accuracy for f 1 kHz and T 23 C 0 01 Digital Filters see Appendix D High pass filter HP hig
201. lerometer and microphone for standard environmental conditions Each of four channels should be calibrated separately For situations where the absolute vibration or sound level value is important a calibration of the measurement channel should be conducted by the user This is due to the fact that the accelerometer or microphone sensitivity is a function of temperature ambient pressure and humidity To select a calibration function the user enters the FUNCTION list by pressing lt MENU gt selecting the FUNCTION text using lt gt or lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt The FUNCTION list contains two sub lists MEASUR FUNCTION and CALIBRATION The user selects the CALIBRATION sub list using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt to highlight CALIBRATION and pressing lt ENTER gt Then the user chooses the channel to calibrate 13 54 MEASUR FUNCT IOH CALIBRATION CHANHEL 3 CHAHHEL 4 c d The view of the displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected a the FUNCTION list opened b the CALIBRATION text selected c and CHANNEL selected d Once the CHANNEL is selected a sub list with two options is available BY SENSITIVITY or BY MEASUREMENT BY SENSITIVITY allows the user to directly enter the sensitivity values for the specific accelerometer or microphone being used BY MEASUREMENT allows the user to present the accelerometer or microphone with a known signal from a calibrator
202. les which include measurement results with H A data gt FILE NAME position enables the user to select files with H A data gt EXPOSURE TIME position defines the time during which measurement results are extrapolated e PARTIAL EAV ELV position displays the partial result of dose EAV and ELV results e PARTIAL EXP position displays the EXPOSURE results for each selected file separately e DAILY EXPOSURE position displays the result of DAILY EXPOSURE results for each selected file separately the result is calculated relatively to EXPOSURE TIME WBV CALCULATOR position used to calculate the various WBV parameters PARTIAL EAV ELV PARTIAL EXPOSURE DAILY EXPOSURE and DAILY DOSE of vibration all results are calculated according to the selected standard e RESULTS SEL position enables the user to select files with measurement results It is possible to select 6 files which include measurement results with WBV data gt FILE NAME position enables the user to select 6 files with WBV data gt EXPOSURE TIME position defines the time for the extrapolation of measurement results The user can set the time for each file separately e PARTIAL EAV ELV position displays the partial result of dose for each file separately EAV and ELV results e PARTIAL RESULTS position displays the PARTIAL EXPOSURE results for each file separately e DAILY RESULTS position displays the results of DAILY EXPOSURE and DAILY DOSE for each selected file sepa
203. losed After pressing lt ESC gt any changes made in the sub list are ignored and the sub list is closed Closing the sub list returns the display to the CHANNELS SETUP sub list VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 2 sub list the selection of the detector time constant Selection of measurement parameters BUFFERS SETUP Selection of the result to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS The measurement results from each channel can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument s SLM or VLM mode The user can switch OFF or ON the BUFFERS position by using lt 4 gt or lt gt gt The selection of the OFF option means that no result from the described channel are to be saved in the buffer s file After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed After pressing lt ESC gt any changes made in the sub list are ignored and the sub list is closed Closing the sub list returns the display to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list 13 29 MEASURE SETUP BUFFERS Eua CUFFERS CHAHHELS SETUP l CHANNEL LHAMNEL CHANNEL The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP the selection of the BUFFERS store The user can select the following results which can be saved PEAK MAX MIN and RMS in the case of SOUND measurement or PEAK P P MAX RMS and VDV in the case of VIBRATION measurement The number of results being s
204. lt gt lt v gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt to scroll to the desired channel then lt ENTER gt to accept Then user can select MODE SOUND or VIBR for CHANNEL x 104 FUMCT IO MEASURE SETUP CHAHHEL 3 CHAHHEL 4 FILE TRIGGER SETUP a c The view of the displays with the main list the INPUT text selected a and the INPUT list opened b the CHANNEL is selected c The view of the displays with the selected MODE text and after entering SOUND a or VIBRATION b mode When the VI 400PRO instrument is working as sound level meter the main results of the channel are presented on the display in the form described below For each channel the selected result is displayed on the left side followed by its value units and the type of the detector The dB dB A or dB C units are related with the weighting filter selected for the given channel the use of LIN Linear weighting filter is indicated by dB units the use of A weighting filter is indicated by dB A units the use of C weighting filter is indicated by dB C units On the right side of the display the RMS detector type selected for the given channel is presented the SLOW type RMS detector is indicated by the symbol S the FAST type RMS detector is indicated by the symbol F the IMPULSE type RMS detector is indicated by the symbol I 18 11 18 18 a l e Aff 1 SPL ri 3de Apis SPL ri 3d A 2 LEtl 24 506 C PARIE 34 506 Cif 2
205. lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed Pressing lt ESC gt returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list EEN BUFFERS ON 4 CHANNEL 3 i4 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 1 sub list the selection of the parameters to be saved in the buffer s file CHANNEL CHANNEL The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list the all the parameters were selected to be saved in the buffer s file in CHANNEL 1 and 2 vibration and in CHANNEL 3 and 4 sound parameters A Notice The change of the channels parameters is not possible while the measurement is performed The user has to finish the current measurement A Notice Setting BUFFER OFF results in bypassing the storing of the given channels results in the buffer s file It creates more space in the buffer for other channels see Chapter 5 for details A Notice The buffer is updated in the time periods steps defined in the BUF STEP path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP The way the measurement results are stored is described in Chapter 5 Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis parameters for vibration signal SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM is a context element which appears on the INPUT sub list in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode Using the SPECTRUM sub list one can select in 1 1 OCTAVE analys
206. lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored The view of the displays in the SHIFT MODE sub list the available settings in the ST SP position Return to the factory made settings CLEAR SETUP The CLEAR SETUP path MENU SETUP CLEAR SETUP position enables the user to return to the manufacturer s default set up of the instrument In order to enter this position the user has to select the CLEAR SETUP text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt After entering this position the request for the confirmation is displayed The position is closed without any action and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ESC gt 13 59 SHIFT MODE REFEREWCE LEVEL The view of the display in the SETUP list the CLEAR SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely The proper answer for the request is selected using lt 4 gt lt gt The instrument returns to the default set up after pressing lt ENTER gt when the answer YES was chosen During the process of the resetting the message Wait is displayed The view of the display during the execution of the CLEAR SETUP operation VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The following message is displayed after the return to the default settings and the instrument waits for the user s reaction 10 4 SETUP CLEARED Are you SUPE YESI PRESS AHY KEY a b c T
207. m 0 01 ms 2 to 798 ms 2 PEAK RANGE RMS 17 8 ms 2 145 0 dB from 1 mms 2 60 0 dB to 56 2 ms 2 155 0 dB 316 ms 2 170 0 dB from 10 mms 2 80 0 dB to 1000 ms 2 180 0 dB e linear measurement with the HP10 filter the measurement ranges for the distance from noise gt 6 dB from 0 0003 ms 2 to 596 ms 2 the sinusoidal signal RMS from 0 003 ms 2 to 798 ms 2 PEAK RANGE RMS Measurement ranges 17 8 ms 2 145 0 dB from 0 5 mms 2 54 0 dB to 56 2 ms 2 155 0 dB 316 ms 2 170 0 dB from 10 mms 2 80 0 dB to 1000 ms 2 180 0 dB Notice In the measurement of the signal with the crest factor n gt 1 41 the upper measurement range for the RMS value is reduced Its value can be calculated from the equation A A 10 20log n 2 m where A is the given range for the sinusoidal signal E g for n 10 and A 140 the value of A is equal to 133 dB Notice In the measurement conditions with the strong electromagnetic disturbances e g near the high voltage transmission lines the lower measurement limit can be drastically shifted as the result of the external field influence on the measurement cables In such cases the careful Shielding of the measurement cables is strongly recommended It is worth to underline that the estimation of the external influence can be performed in site by the observations of the measurement signal spectrum Vl 400Pro User Manual Frequency ran
208. measurements can be done in the following way 1 Attach the acoustic calibrator QC 20 or equivalent 94 dB 1000 Hz to the microphone of the instrument A Notice Before starting the calibration measurement the user has to set the level of the signal generated by the given calibrator This is done using lt 4 gt lt gt in the CAL LEVEL position of BY MEASUREMENT sub list The output level of the calibrator should be marked on a label affixed to the calibrator 2 Switch on the calibrator and wait a couple of seconds before starting the calibration measurement 3 Start the calibration measurement by pressing lt START STOP gt The calibration measurement starts after a 5 second delay countdown The measurement time is also predefined to 5 seconds During the calibration period lt ESC gt and lt PAUSE gt do not operate but it is possible to stop the measurement using the lt START STOP gt It is not recommended to stop the calibration measurement before programmed 5 second period completes gt 0 00 0 00 CAL LEWEL CAL LEWEL 94 GE calibration CALIBRATION DELAY 465 DELAY 275 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 24 59 CAL LEVEL 34 48 dB cal Measure LEG 93 309E The view of the displays during the calibration measurement Waiting for the start of the calibration measurement the DELAY is counted down on the display and the CALIBRATION text toggles from big small letters During the me
209. ment is performed The user has to finish the current measurement A Notice Setting BUFFER OFF results in bypassing the storing of the given channels results in the buffer s file It creates more space in the buffer for other channels see Chapter 5 for details A Notice The buffer is updated in the time periods steps defined in the BUF STEP path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP The way the measurement results are stored is described in Chapter 5 A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished VI 400PRO USER MANUAL E I 0 0 l BUFFERS OW CHANNEL i CS CHANEL 538 CHANNEL 3 i The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the BUFFERS SETUP lists path MENU INPUT BUFFERS SETUP A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer and the SLM Selection of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis parameters for acoustic signal SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM is a context element which appears on the INPUT sub list in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode Us
210. ment is measuring the signal The message with letters changing from upper to lower case and vice versa is displayed in this case see below measurement MEASUREMENT iff progress IH FROGRESS The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible The SAVE position is displayed once more after about 3 seconds The message presented below Fig a is displayed after pressing lt ENTER gt when no measurements were performed and there are no results to be saved The operation also can not be done when the file of the selected name already exists in the instrument s memory Fig b The instrument then waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed after that pressing the display returns to the SAVE position VI 400PRO USER MANUAL J 19 13 26 SAVE 29AFPF 15 used PRESS AHY KEY Ho results PRESS AHY KEY a b The view of the displays after the SAVE operation when no results are available for storing a and a file with the selected name already exists in the instrument s memory b The data are saved in the file with the name increased by one number at the end of the SAVE NEXT text after pressing lt ENTER gt if the instrument is not measuring and there are the results to be stored A Notice In the SAVE NEXT function it is possible to save a file pressing lt ENTER skipping the full or simplified edition
211. meter from the CHANNEL x sub list pressing lt gt lt Y gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made is made after pressing lt ESC gt id ld BUFFERS i OFF CLI CHANNEL 3 3 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 1 sub list the selection of the parameters to be saved in the buffer s file The view of the displays in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list the all the parameters were selected to be saved in the buffer s file in CHANNEL 1 and 2 vibration and in CHANNEL 3 and 4 sound parameters A Notice The change of the channels parameters is not possible when the measurement is performed The user has to finish the current measurement A Notice Setting BUFFER OFF results in bypassing the storing of the given channels results in the buffer s file It creates more space in the buffer for other channels see Chapter 5 for details A Notice The buffer is updated in the time periods steps defined in the BUF STEP path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP BUF STEP The way the measurement results are stored is described in Chapter 5 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis parameters for acoustic signal SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x SPECTRUM is a context element which appears on the INPUT sub list in 1 1 O
212. n order to change the display mode the user has to press lt gt or lt gt The following modes are available One profile 3 PROFILES SPECTRUM and PLOT A Notice The user can select the number of the currently active display modes switching on V or off the given mode in the DISPLAY MODES sub list of the DISPLAY list Only one profile mode cannot be switched off See Chapter 5 for the details about the display modes control One Profile 3 PROFILES and PLOT display modes are the same as for the VLM The SPECTRUM mode displays 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results so called spectrum together with three TOTAL RMS values measured with the weighting filters Those filters are set in the TOTAL VALUES sub list of the DISPLAY SETUP list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 10 03 10 04 DISPLAY MODES l DISPLAY SCALE BATTERY TOTAL 3 The displays with the settings influencing the first TOTAL value presented in the SPECTRUM mode The first TOTAL value is measured with e the HP weighting filter when it is true RMS value in the whole band or e with the filter specified as VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or e any other filter which name and the coefficients are sent to the unit by serial interface The coefficients of the user defined filters are set in the VIBR FILTERS sub list of the SETUP list path MENU SETUP USER FILTERS VIBR FILTERS It is also possible to s
213. nction o DIGITAL OUT position in this mode the VI 400Pro is connected to some external device which is triggered by the VI 400Pro to measure This mode is used in conjunction with the TRIGGER PULSE function SHIFT MODE sub list SHIFT position available modes of the lt gt push button Shift or 2nd Fun ST SP position available modes of the lt START STOP gt push button Normal or Inverse Note If Inverse mode is selected the Start Stop function will only occur when the lt START STOP gt push button is used in conjunction with the lt gt push button CLEAR SETUP position enables the user to return to the factory default settings of the instrument the confirmation has to be done before the execution of this function Are you sure RMS INTEGRATION sub list RMS INTEGRATION position available values of detectors type LINEAR or EXPONENTIAL REFERENCE LEVEL sub list available choices VIBRATION or SOUND VIBRATION e ACC it enables the user to set the reference level of the acceleration for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 um s2 to 100 m s2 e VEL it enables the user to set the reference level of the velocity for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 nm s to 100 nm s e DIL it enables the user to set the reference level of the displacement for the logarithmic scale the results expres
214. ndard TA Larm The Ld Le Ln Lde Len Lnd and Lden results Only one from the mentioned above results is available in the instrument It depends on the day and night time in which the measurement was performed It is assumed that e the day time denoted as Ty starts from 7 am and ends at 7 pm e the evening time denoted as Te starts from 7 pm and ends at 11 pm e the night time denoted as Tn starts at 11 pm and ends at 7 am The mentioned above results are calculated from the following expressions yo Ld 20 log fiw t p dt Ty 0 Te 0 Tn 0 d Ta F J Le 5 dB 20 log lt lew t p rat Ta 0 Te 0 Ty 0 e Te i J Ln 10 dB 20 log T frw t p Y dt Ta 0 Te 0 Tn 0 n Th Lde 10 log agit 40 4 for Ta 0 Te 0 Th z 0 12 Len 10log AN 10 8 10 Ta 0 Te 0 Tn 0 4 VI 400Pro USER MANUAL Lnd 10 log 5 5 8 101 12 101 Ta 0 Te 0 Tn 0 1 Lden 10 log 12 8 4 12 10 4 10 8 101 Ta 0 Te 0 Tn 0 Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL D 2 CHARACTERISTICS OF DIGITAL FILTERS IMPLEMENTED IN VI 400Pro The digital weighting filters implemented in the SLM mode HP cut off frequency 0 770 Hz 0 1 dB 0 225 Hz 3 0 dB o 004 O 008 O lt 016 0 031 0 063 0 125 0 25 0 5 L 2 4 a 16 Hz 88 6 70 5 547 35 3 19 56 8 2 2 45 0 50 O 01 0 07 0 03 0 01 0 00 dB Characteristics of the HP filter implemented in the VI 400
215. nel of the VI 400PRO instrument VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 3 SETTING UP THE INSTRUMENT In order to perform measurements using the instrument the user has only to plug in the preamplifier with the microphone and or the appropriate vibration accelerometer then switch the power on 3 1 BASIS OF THE INSTRUMENT S CONTROL The instrument is controlled by means of nine push buttons of the keyboard Using these push buttons one can access all available functions The functions are placed in the system of lists and sub lists The main list contains the headers of six lists which also contain sub lists or positions elements The main list is opened after pressing the lt MENU gt push button This list contains the following lists FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE AUX FUNCTIONS and SETUP The elements of each list are described in details in Chapter 4 and 5 Only the one highlighted item can be accessed at a time Pressing the lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt push buttons will change the highlighted line FUMCT LOH FUMCT ITOH IHMPUT FILE 8 05 LAY FOHCTIOHS The view of the displays with the highlighted elements of the main list Double pressing of the lt MENU gt push button displays a list containing the four sub lists most recently accessed by the user The example of this list is presented below This functionality enables one to quickly access the four most frequently used lists B 17 TIMER The view
216. nge is VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 130 dB the Y sign would result if the measurement were from 130 1 dB to 140 dB The Bell icon overlaod appears when the signal surpasses the measurement range by more than 7 5 dB cf Fig below cE al E 23 59 chal E 27 59 Me Tal E 23 59 g The view of the display in the SLM mode without the Vertical bars icon a with one Vertical bar b with two Vertical bars c d with three Vertical bars e f with three Vertical bars and the Y sign g with the Bell icon overload i The number of the Vertical bars on the display depends on the level of the measured signal the selected mode SLM VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis etc and the calibration factor The limits of the signal causing the different icon s indication for the calibration factor equal to 0 dB are presented in the Table 3 1 for sound measurements and in Table 3 2 for vibration measurements Non zero calibration factors will cause a shift of the limits given in the tables A Notice The Bell icon is used as an indicator of an overload When the level of the measured signal is below the measuring range UNDERRANGE appears below the measurement result in one profile display mode In 3 PROFILES display mode a downward pointing arrow is used to indicate underrange A Notice The UNDERRANGE is indicated only in the case of sound measurem
217. nstrument s memory without entering the SAVE or SAVE NEXT position in order to perform this operation the INT TIME should be set to at least 10 s available choices V or gt LOAD sub list enables the user to verify the list of files in the memory and to load the selected one to the working buffer of the instrument the NO FILES text is displayed when the instrument s memory is empty gt DELETE sub list enables the user to verify the list of files in the memory and to delete the selected one the NO FILES text is displayed when the instrument s memory is empty gt DELETE ALL sub list enables the user to delete all files saved in the instruments memory the confirmation is required before all files are erased Are you sure gt DEFRAGMENTATION sub list enables the user to recover the memory previously used by the deleted files the confirmation is required before this operation is executed Are you sure The text Defragmentation unnecessary PRESS ANY KEY is displayed when the instrument s memory was empty before attempting defragmentation gt CLEAR BUFFER position enables the user to delete all files saved in the buffer of the instrument the confirmation is required before all files are erased from the buffer memory Are you sure gt CATALOGUE sub list enables the user to verify the list of files in memory the NO FILES text is displayed when the instrument s memory is empty gt FREE SPACE wind
218. nts Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 and VeIMF The view of the displays in the PROFILE 2 sub list the selection of the weighting filter for velocity measurements e for displacement measurements Dil1 Dil3 and Dil10 MODE C2 RAMGE FILTER DETECT The view of the displays in the PROFILE 2 sub list the selection of the weighting filter for displacement measurements The characteristics of the filters are given in Appendix D The selection of the required filter is made using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user can pass to the selection of the next parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list by pressing lt gt lt Y gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed After pressing lt ESC gt any changes made in the sub list are ignored and the sub list is closed Closing the sub list returns the display to the CHANNELS SETUP sub list Selection of the RMS detector in VLM DETECTOR In the instrument s VLM mode the selection of the required detector is made using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The following detectors are available 100 ms 125 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 0 s 2 0 s 5 0 s and 10 0 s The selection of the required detector is made using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user can scroll to the selection of the next parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list by pressing lt gt lt V gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is c
219. number of the file in the buffer and the number of all saved files NO e The number of the records in the file which number is displayed in the previous line RECS e The size of the empty still available memory FREE The view of the display with the DISPLAY list the BUFFER VIEW text highlighted path MENU DISPLAY BUFFER VIEW The type of the measurement results stored in the buffer in channel 1 2 3 4 chosen in the CHANNEL x sub list of the CHANNELS SETUP sub list as well as the results selected for the registration in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis chosen in the BUFFERS SETUP sub list of the INPUT sub list are given on the right side of the display The change of the number of the file in the buffer is done after pressing the lt 4 gt lt gt gt push buttons be B25 BUF UTEM 5S UTEW 5 aa H E 4 7 a ae i FUER RECS FECS 4 FREE 1SM 4 aa 15M 43 The view of the displays with the BUFFER VIEW sub list opened the selection of the file to be seen The display of the instrument after entering the BUFFER VIEW sub list looks as shown in the figure below when the buffer is empty there was no measurement or the measurements were performed but with the settings for all channels and the spectrum BUFFER ON on the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP sub list frra 23 59 BUF VIEW rra 23 59 BUF WIEW BUF EMPTY FREE 3456F BUF EMPTY FREE 1a
220. o VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Lela ORRECTIOW RE oo E10 TIMER USER FILTERS 4 EN FIELD CORRECTIOH FIELD CORRECTIOH ich SS l TE IS ID22 LEM 10 34 L CORRECTION UTEN 4 IF 18 ID22 EDIT 130 Wed CLEAR CLEAR AE E 10 46 10 46 ExT IZO SETUP EXT IZO SETUP MODE MODE CHANNEL FURCT TOR EXT TRIGGER ID 04 STAT LEWELS SETUP CLEARED Est Id SETUP SHIFT MODE PRESS AHY KEY Ie 10 EMS INTEGRATION RMS ian LEINE AR HAE RMS IHTEGRATIOHT WARHIHGS Ie 15 RMS IHTEGRATIOHt REFEREHCE LEVELS UIBRATIOH UHITS LME TE TE VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 10 55 Ie 14 WIBRAT LOH REFEREWCE LEVELS 24 Pa IE IE IEN WIBRATIOM UHITS PHOHSMETRIC I 18 WARHIMGS RES MOT SAVE Liiki IAT IAT SEO asa DOSE MEASURE DOSE 11 35 EsPOSURE TIME ler MEASURE DOSE STAHDARTS ler MEASURE DOSE EXPOSURE TIME STAHMDART HA EAU 2 o8rm s HA ELU 3 obrm s2 WE EAN 9 16mi 2 28 STAHDART HA EAU 2 38ms HA ELU 3 abrm s2 WE EAN Sn sep 24 STAHDART HA EAU amp iris HA ELU 8 br s2 WE EAN B Bamsa Control diagram of the SETUP menus VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 3 2 POWERING THE INSTRUMENT The VI 400PRO is powered from four internal replaceable AA alkaline batteries For the external power operation an adapter should be connected to the Power socket located on the bottom cover of the instrument Fully charged batteries will ensures
221. o be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored 1 15 EREHCE LEVELS FEHCE LEVELS REFEREMCE LEVELS 1 an mise eee 1 mise 1 at mise The display s view in the REFERENCE LEVEL sub list the reference level setting of velocity signal REF ACC WEL DIL REFE ACC WEL DIL 5 27 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Setting the reference level of the displacement signal DIL In the DIL position the user can set the reference level of the displacement signal It is possible to set this level from 1 pm to 100 pm with 1 pm steps pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The steps can be increased to 10 pm increments pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored 11 19 11 19 11 19 RENGE LEVELS FEHCE LEVELS FEHCE LEVELS fst 1 fst 1 fst The display s view in the REFERENCE LEVEL sub list the reference level setting of displacement signal For sound measurements the REFERENCE LEVEL sub lists is used only to inform the user that the reference level of the acoustic signal is equal to 20 uPa After pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt the sub list is closed E FEFEFEHCE LEVELS 20 uFa The view of the display in the REFERENCE LEVEL su
222. of the display after double pressing of the lt MENU gt push button with the sub lists which were most recently accessed by the user After the selection of the desired list using the lt gt or lt Y gt push buttons the user has to press the lt ENTER gt push button to enter the choice After this a new sub list position element or various data specification will appear on the display VI 400PRO USER MANUAL FUMCT ITOH BUFFERS SETUP FILE 1 1 OCTAVE SETU a The view of the displays with the main list a and the elements of the INPUT list b Next pressing of the lt ENTER gt push button enables one to access mentioned above sub lists The view of the display with the opened MEASURE SETUP sub list path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP The desired position of a list is accessed after pressing the lt gt or lt Y gt push button The display with the opened MEASURE SETUP sub list the INT TIME position accessible To change the value in a selected position press the lt 4 gt or lt gt gt push buttons The displays with the accessed INT TIME position after pressing the lt 4 gt or lt gt gt push buttons respectively The lt ENTER gt push button is used to confirm the selection in a position and for closing the opened sub list The sub list can be closed ignoring any changes made in that sub list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button B24 FUMCT ITOH BUFFERS SETUP 1 1 OCTA
223. of the file s name The following message containing the file name and the operation being performed is displayed during the file s saving 29AFR Saving The view of the display during the execution of the SAVE operation Another message is displayed after successfully saving the file in the memory and then the instrument waits for a reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed after a push button is pressed the display returns to the FILE list The assumptive file s name is displayed after repeated enter to the SAVE position of the FILE list after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button 13 52 13 54 2oRS e A Saved 0 K F b PRESS AHY KEY The displays with the SAVE NEXT function a after saving the file with the increased name b and after repeated lt ENTER gt to the SAVE NEXT function c It is not possible to store the data in the file which already exists when the REPLACE position path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS is not active The message presented below is displayed after pressing lt ENTER gt when the user has selected the name which was used before The instrument then waits for the reaction from the user any push button except lt Altf gt should be pressed after pressing a push button the display returns to the FILE list 13 51 13 51 29RS aha 15 used PRESS AHY KEY a b The displays after the file s name selection a and wi
224. ofile display mode shows a solid vertical line separating the measurement result from its description 3 PROFILES display mode two solid horizontal lines are used to separate the measurement results from different channels In modes other than SLM or VLM the separating lines mentioned above are dotted The view of the display in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode b for results which are not from the SLM or VLM mode A Notice See Chapters 4 and 5 for more details concerning different settings Additional information about the instrument s state are given by means of a row of icon s at the top of the display The meanings of these icons are as follows Bell is displayed as a WARNING in several situations When the Bell icon appears the user should pay attention to the state of the instrument Typically some user s action is required for example a low battery state or too high an input signal OVERLOAD etc ra 23 59 The view of the display with the Bell icon Loudspeaker icon is displayed at the start of and during measurement The view of the display with the Loudspeaker icon Vertical bars icon corresponds to the current input signal level it is related to the maximum measured value over the last second The Y sign means that the level of the signal was from 0 1 dB to 10 dB higher then the current measurement range For example in SLM mode where the ra
225. om 1 m min to 59 m with 1 minute or 10 minute steps and 9 46 9 4 9 48 START DELAY 25 H START Hee 25 START PEERY 25 IHT TIME EN IHT TIHE IHT TIME REP CYCLE nt FEF CYCLE nt f FEF CYCLE ri BUF STEP is BUF STEP 1s BUF STEP 1s The view of the displays setting the INT TIME path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP time expressed in minutes from 1 h to 24 h with 1 hour or 10 hours step 9 4 9 4 START THESE 25 START TED 2s IHT TIME IHT TIME REP CYCLE nt FEF CYCLE nt FEF CYCLE ri BUF STEP is BUF STEP 1s BUF STEP 1s The view of the displays setting the INT TIME path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP time expressed in 9 42 START DELAY 25 IHT TIME hours A Notice The measurement can also be temporarily stopped by pressing the lt PAUSE gt push button It inserts an arbitrary long PAUSE The measurements can be continued after pressing the lt gt lt PAUSE gt together with the lt gt The last second of the measurement can be cancelled by the subsequent pressing lt PAUSE gt This procedure can be repeated up to fifteen times last 16 seconds of the measurement can be cancelled and erased from the memory A Notice If the the AUTO SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS AUTO SAVE function is turned on the minimum value of the integration time is 10 seconds VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Setting number of repetition of measurement cycl
226. on measurements For sound measurements there are two other values of this position RMS for filter LIN and C LEQ for filter A The user can select filter in FILTER position path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x FILTER In order to enter this list one has to press lt ENTER gt on the high lighted SPECTRUM TYPE text of the DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x list The SPECTRUM TYPE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the CHANNEL x list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes 12 49 DISPLAY SCALE TOTAL WALUES CHAHHEL 1 ii CHAHHEL 4 The view of the display with the DISPLAY list the SPECTRUM TYPE text highlighted path MENU DISPLAY CHANNEL x SPECTRUM TYPE SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM ILLELERAT LUM WELT The view of the display with the SPECTRUM TYPE with the available values for VIBRATION measurements VI 400PRO USER MANUAL SPECTRUM SPECTRUM i re The view of the display with the SPECTRUM TYPE with the available values for SOUND measurements Selection of the buffer s file to the display presentation BUFFER VIEW The BUFFER VIEW sub list enables the user to examine the contents of the buffer In order to open this sub list the user has to press lt ENTER gt when the BUFFER VIEW text is high lighted The following parameters of the buffer are presented on the instrument s display e The selected
227. on to 10 0 mV ms To exit from this screen without changing the sensitivity press lt ESC gt When the sensitivity of the accelerometer is greater than 10 0 mV ms the calibration factor will be negative SEMSITIVITY SEMSITIUITY A AdE b The view of the displays while setting the sensitivity greater then 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing lt ENTER gt with the new calibration factor calculated b When the sensitivity of the accelerometer is less than 10 0 mV ms the corresponding calibration factor will be positive SEHSITIUIT Y SEMSITIUITY AdB A SB The view of the displays while setting the sensitivity less than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing lt ENTER gt with the new calibration factor calculated b The lowest sensitivity value allowed is 10 0 uV ms it will result in a calibration factor of 60 0 dB The greatest sensitivity value allowed is 10 0 V ms it will result in a calibration factor of 60 0 dB A Note The calibration factor is always added to the results in the VIBRATION LEVEL METER mode VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and the FFT analysis modes To return to the CALIBRATION sub list the user has to press lt ESC gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Calibration BY SENSITIVITY for acoustic signal The calibration BY SENSITIVITY for a microphone can be conducted in the following way 1 Select BY SENSITIVITY from the CALIBRATION sub list and press lt EN
228. one position The view of the display in the SETUP list the WARNINGS text highlighted Saving the measurement results in a file RES NOT SAVE LAST RESULT NOT SAVED In order for this warning message to be displayed the user has to place the special character in the warning s position using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The position is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ENTER gt confirming a change made in the position or lt ESC gt ignoring a change made in the position WARHI HGS WARHIHGS RES HOT SAVE RYT RES WOT SAVE LEAI The view of the displays in the WARNINGS sub list the selection of the RES NOT SAVE position When the position is set to be active the special warning will be displayed after pressing lt START STOP gt The condition causing the warning message will be that the result of the previous measurement have not been saved in a file of the instrument The warning which will appear on the display is presented below 1 1 49 LAST RESULT LAST RESULT OT SAVED HOT SAVED H Continue EI Continue The view of the displays with the warning that the previous results were not saved and the confirmation The default value of the CONTINUE position is NO After pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt the instrument returns to the active mode of measurement result s presentation without starting the new measurement process Using lt 4 gt lt gt gt one can change the
229. ow informs the user about the size of the available memory for saving measurement results in files and the TOTAL AVAILABLE bytes of the memory the number displayed in the FREE SPACE will increase by the memory which was previously used by the files that are deleted 14 57 SAVE SAUE OPTIONS 15 09 SAWE SAVE OPTIONS LOA IS Ie SAVE OPTIONS LOA DELETE 15 14 t DELETE DELETE ALL 15 19 DEFRAGMENTATIOHt FREE SPACE 5 25 DEFRAGHEHTATIOHt CLEAR BUFFER 5 29 DEFRAGMEHTATIOHt CLEAR BUFFER CATALOGUE VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Fae Cor 15 26 HO FILES 13 47 LOAD 12 MAY 15 58 22 5 26 HO FILES 13 49 DEL 33 11 MAY 13 49 32 5 26 HO FILES 17 51 FILE 22 E 1i MAY 13 47 28 Control diagram of the FILE menus 14 53 FILE HAME EPHAR SHZ DEL SH THS 14 52 SALE Ho results PRESS AHY KEY 1348 BMA Loaded 0 K PRESS AHY KEY 13 50 SC iMAYa Deleted O K PRESS AHY KEV ALL FILES Deleted OK PRESS AHY KEY VI 400PRO USER MANUAL AUX FUNCTIONS from main list gt HAV WBV CALC position HAV CALCULATOR position enables the user to calculate the various H A parameters PARTIAL EAV ELV PARTIAL EXPOSURE and DAILY EXPOSURE of vibration All results are calculated according to the selected standard e RESULTS SEL position enables the user to select files with particular measurement results It is possible to select 6 fi
230. ows General features of VI 400PRO e Internal buffer for logging more then two weeks of 1 sec RMS MAX MIN PEAK results in the SLM mode and RMS MAX P P PEAK results in the VLM mode 32 MB of non volatile memory e USB 1 1 interface e Operates from four user replaceable AA size alkaline batteries operational time gt 8 h e Handheld robust case e Light weight 500 grams VI 400PRO as Vibration Meter amp Analyzer e Vibration measurements according to ISO 2631 1 with Type 1 accuracy ISO 8041 in the frequency range 1 Hz 20 kHz e Simultaneous PEAK RMS incl MTVV and RMQ incl VDV measurements e W Bxy W Bz W Bc KB H A Wy We Wa Wj ISO 8041 and ISO 2631 1 weighting filters e 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave real time analysis 15 filters with center frequencies 1 Hz 16 kHz Type 1 IEC 1260 and 45 filters with center frequencies 0 8 Hz 20 kHz Type 1 IEC 1260 e FFT calculation optional 1920 lines in real time up to 22 4 kHz with Hanning kl window and linear averaging spectra simultaneous to the VLM operation VI 400PRO as Sound Level Meter amp Analyzer e Noise measurements SPL LEQ SEL Lden Ltm3 Ltm5 and statistics with Type 1 accuracy in the frequency range of 10 Hz to 20 kHz e Simultaneous IMPULSE FAST and SLOW detectors for the sound measurements with A C or LIN filters e 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave real time analysis optional 15 filters with center frequen
231. r of the currently active display modes switching on v or off the given mode in the DISPLAY MODES sub list of the DISPLAY list Only One profile mode cannot be switched off See Chapter 5 for the details about the display modes control VI 400PRO USER MANUAL One Profile 3 PROFILES and PLOT display modes are identical as for the VLM The SPECTRUM mode displays 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results so called spectrum together with the TOTAL RMS value measured with the HP weighting filter and the TOTAL values measured for filters which are set in the TOTAL VALUES sub list of the DISPLAY SETUP list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x TOTAL VALUES 10 03 10 04 DISPLAY MODES 1 DISPLAY SCALE BATTERY The displays with the settings influencing the first TOTAL value presented in the SPECTRUM mode The first TOTAL value is measured with e the HP weighting filter in this case it is true RMS value in the whole band or e with the filter specified as VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or e Any other filter which name and the coefficients are sent to the unit by the serial interface The coefficients of the user defined filters are set in the VIBR FILTERS sub list of the SETUP list path MENU SETUP USER FILTERS VIBR FILTERS t is also possible to send the coefficients of the filters used in the calculations by means of the serial interface from a PC a special function is developed for this purpose contact Quest Technologie
232. r to select a choice of NO LOCK PARTIAL or FULL ee ee ee The detailed description of the elements of the SETUP list is presented in Chapter 5 For sound level measurements one position is important the setting of the RMS INTEGRATION parameter For vibration level measurements three positions are important the setting of the RMS INTEGRATION parameter the REFERENCE LEVEL and the VIBRATION UNITS The RMS INTEGRATION position enables the user to select the detector type for the calculations of the LEQ function The formulas used for the LEQ calculation are given in Appendix D 12 24 2 24 RMS THTEGRATIOM RMS THTEGRATIOM E I HEHE PESPUNENT LAL a c The view of the displays in the SETUP list path MENU SETUP a and with the possible options of RMS INTEGRATION b c The selection of the LINEAR option causes the LEQ SEL and Ld en results not to depend on the detector time constant set in any channel Other results i e the SPL value depend on the detector which was used during the calculations this detector setting is presented on the display by name The PEAK value never depends on the detector time constant VI 400PRO USER MANUAL cH 3 99 0 C The view of the displays when the LINEAR option is selected in the RMS INTEGRATION The selection of the EXPONENTIAL option causes the LEQ SEL and Ld en results to depend on the detector time constant set in any channel as well as the other results i e the SPL value
233. rately The result is calculated relatively to EXPOSURE TIME 9 58 HAL CALCULATOR LEU CALCULATOR VI 400PRO USER MANUAL FEE n FILE NAME a et Misr Baoan L EXP EXPOSURE EMPTY FILE WANE Baheem 9 50 RESULTS SEL tE DAILY EXPOSURE 9 55 DAILY EXPOSURE 8 68 mis FILE MAME l 31 EMPTy ESULTS 4 EMPTY EEE 10 02 RESULTS SEL H3 DAILY RESULTS i PARTIAL 10 09 DAILY EXPOSURE mig DAILY DOSE BBB mis Control diagram of the AUX FUNCTION menus Ke VI 400PRO USER MANUAL SETUP from main list gt TIMER sub list 7 TIME position enables the user to set a time the instrument will automatically turn itself on gt RTC sub list RTC position enables the user to set the internal real time clock of the instrument gt FIELD CORRECTION sub list available only in sound meter mode FIELD CORRECTION position available values of the compensation required when the sound measurements performed are in the diffuse field condition FREE or DIFFUSE gt USER FILTERS sub list VIBR FILTERS e VIEW 0 VIEW enables the user to select which filter should be viewed the available options are VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 and any other transmitted to the instrument via computer interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and saved under the name USER1 USER2 USER3 or any o
234. ration dose in defined standard It is possible to set the standard using lt 4 gt lt gt gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has to be pressed which closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored The user can rewind the limit list using lt gt lt Y gt or lt 1 gt lt gt STAHCDARD HA EAU HA ELL WE EAU 1 20 STANDARD HA EAL E MiS HA ELI 5 m s WE EAN 6 56m5 24 lel STANDAR RD Tem MND 2 Bamise MNN SD 11 20mise z ONDNSh 0 8 m s2 l Sa LAMS E The view of the displays in the STANDARDS window for POLAND standard VI 400PRO USER MANUA The user can also define their own limits by selecting the position USER PIR HOAR D ERY Br UE EAI GO miz WE EL The view of the displays in the STANDARDS window for USER standard The user can select the following limits in HA mode EAV and ELV in WB mode EAV and ELV The selection of the position in the set is performed using lt gt lt V gt The value is introduced by pressing lt Altf gt and lt lt 4 gt or lt Altf gt and lt gt In the case of WB limits the user can change the units also 12 44 STANDARD USER ae eee USER HA EAL ze A Ha EL The view of the displays in the STANDARDS window for USER standard the selection of the unit s position The selection of the units position in the set is performed using
235. ration measurements Below the SLM mode settings are presented Selection of the instruments mode MODE Each of the four channels of the VI 400Pro can be programmed indepently for Sound or Vibration measurements For vibration measurements the user selects VIBR in the MODE position of CHANNEL x sub list path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x For sound measurements the user selects SOUND in the MODE position of CHANNEL x sub list MODE CS gt RANGE FILTER HP DETECT 1 05 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 2 sub list the selection of the instruments mode Selection of the measurement range RANGE Te RANGE position is selected using lt gt lt Y gt path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE Using lt 4 gt lt gt scroll through the available values for RANGE 105 dB or 130 dB for Sound and 17 8 m s or 316 m s for vibration Specifications of the input ranges can be found in appendix C Pressing lt ESC gt ignors a selection change and returns to the CHANNEL x list Pressing lt ENTER gt accepts the selection and returns to the CHANNEL x list E BH FUNCT IOM MEASURE SETUP H FILE VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 9 05 UIER FILTER DETECT 1 60s 1 8s The view of the displays with the RANGE position path MENU INPUT CHANNEL x RANGE selected in VIBRATION mode aT 0 11 MODECS9 SOUND MODES SOUND RANGE RAHGE Bef i MIC CORRECT IOH MIC CORRECTION PROFILE 1 i FROFILE
236. ress lt ENTER gt to accept LEVEL METER mode and close the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list A Notice The instrument mode can not be changed during measurements In such instance the display shows measurement in progress MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS for about 3 seconds To change the instrument mode the measurement must be completed A distinguishing feature of the VI 400Pro is that sound vibration is always measured in four separate sound vibration level meter channels working independently A Notice The LEVEL METER is a main mode of the instrument In the LM mode there is no simultaneous access to 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis For each of the channels the RMS detector type and the weighting filter can be defined independently see the INPUT list VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 2 1 Sound level meter The sound level meter mode can be set in any channel Users can set the sound or vibration mode in CHANNELS SETUP sub list To select the SLM mode path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x MODE the user selects the MAIN MENU by pressing lt MENU gt scrolls to INPUT using lt gt lt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt presses lt ENTER gt then scrolls to CHANNELS SETUP using lt gt lt V gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt then presses lt ENTER gt The CHANNELS SETUP list contains four sub lists CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 and CHANNEL 4 Next the user has to open the CHANNEL x sub list using
237. ressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of the filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the user can set the values of correcting coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz center frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB 1 00 Hz available values of 1Hz center frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB K9 K9 K9 20 0kHz available values of 20 kHz center frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB CLEAR position CLEAR enables the user to select which filters should be cleared the available options are as follows ALL SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other VI 400PRO USER MANUA The selection of the position in this sub list is performed by means of lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing lt ESC gt push button ignoring a change made in the position After pressing lt ENTER gt on the highlighted text the proper sub list is opened ETC 10 06 WTEW CLEAR CLEAR SETUP The display s view in the USER FILTERS sub list in vibration measurements the selection of the position Setting the coefficients of the user filters set EDIT position After pressing lt ENTER gt when the VUSR1 in the EDIT position text is highlighted the sub list containing the status of the selected set and the values of the coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters is opened The
238. rofile TOTAL 3 5 6 Selection of spectrum type SPECTRUM TYPE 5 7 Selection of the buffer s file to the display presentation BUFFER VIEW 5 8 Checking the state of the internal battery BATTERY 5 12 Setting the contrast of the display CONTRAST 5 13 Setting the backlight parameters BACKLIGHT 5 14 Automatic switch off of the backlight TIMEOUT 5 14 Setting the brightness of the backlight BRIGHTNESS 5 14 Checking specification of the instrument UNIT LABEL 5 15 5 2 SETUP MENU 5 16 Programming of the instrument s internal timer TIMER 5 17 Programming of the instrument s internal Real Time Clock RTC 5 18 Setting the conditions for the diffuse field measurements FIELD CORRECTION 5 18 Introduction the filter coefficients for 1 3 1 1 OCTAVE analysis USER FILTERS 5 19 Setting the coefficients of the user filters set EDIT position 5 21 Setting the coefficients of the user filters CLEAR 5 21 Selection of statistics levels to be saved in a file STAT LEVELS 5 22 Selection of the external mode EXT I O SETUP 5 23 Selection of few push buttons mode SHIFT MODE 5 24 Selection of the working mode of lt Altf gt push button SHIFT 5 24 Selection of the working mode of lt START STOP gt push button ST SP 5 24 Return to the factory made settings CLEAR SETUP 5 25 Selection of detector s type in the LEQ RMS calculations RMS INTEGRATION 5 26 Setting the reference signal in vibration measurements RE
239. rt delay before the start of measurement position of measure setup 4 22 sub list STATISTICS Measurement results presentation mode graphical position of DISPLAY sub list 5 1 TIMER Programming of the instrument s internal timer position of SETUP list 5 17 TOTAL VALUE Selection the weighted filter sub list of DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x list 5 5 TRIGGER SETUP Selection of mode and parameters of triggering sub list of INPUT list 4 32 TRIGGER Switching triggering on and off position of TRIGGER SETUP sub list 4 32 UNIT LABEL Checking specification of the instrument position of DISPLAY list 5 15 USER FILTERS Introduction of 1 3 octave filter coefficients sub list of SETUP list 5 19 VECTOR DEFINITION Selecting of the vector coefficient sub list of SETUP list 5 30 VEL Setting the reference level for velocity measurements position of REFERENCE LEVEL sub list 5 27 VIBRATION UNITS Selection of the vibration units position of SETUP list 5 28 WBV CALCULATOR Selection of DOSE measurements position of FUNCTION sub list X ZOOM Scaling of the horizontal axis of the graphical presentation position of DISPLAY SCALE sub list TECHNOLOGIES WORLDWIDE HEADQUARTERS 1060 Corporate Center Drive Oconomowoc Wisconsin 53066 USA 262 567 9157 ISO 9001 2000 Registered Company E a 072 021 ISO 17025 Accredited Calibration Lab 600 245 077 f Rev A Employee Owned Company www Quest Technologies com 11 01 05
240. s lt Enter gt lt Menu gt lt Esc gt escape lt gt backlight lt Alt f gt alternate function lt A gt up arrow lt lt gt left arrow lt gt gt right arrow lt vV gt down arrow lt Pause gt lt Proceed gt lt Start Stop gt COON Oo FP WHND The name in brackets denotes the alternate function of a push button which is available using the lt Alt f gt push button The view of the control push buttons of the VI 400PRO instrument VI 400PRO USER MANUAL lt gt The lt gt push button can be programmed by the user to function in Shift mode or 24 Function mode e In Shift mode an alternate function is accessed by pressing the lt gt push button and the desired push button at the same time e In 2 Function mode and alternate function is accessed by first pressing and releasing the lt gt push button then pressing the desired push button A Notice The operation of the lt gt push button can be set as the Shift mode or the 2nd Fun mode in the SHIFT MODE window of the SETUP list see Chapter 5 for the SETUP list description lt START STOP gt This push button enables one to start or stop the measurement process It can be programmed by the user to function in Normal or Inverse modes e In Normal mode pressing just the lt START STOP gt push button once will start or stop the measuremen
241. s MEASURE SETUP sub list INT TIME 1 m REP CYCLE 1 BUF STEP 7 s BUFFERS SETUP sub list CHANNEL 1 BUFFERS PEAK CHANNEL 2 BUFFERS RMS CHANNEL 3 BUFFERS None CHANNEL 4 BUFFERS None Then after the end of the measurement the current file in the buffer will contain 8 PEAK values for each 7 second period set in the BUF STEP position from channel 1 and 8 RMS values from channel 2 A Notice Setting BUFFER OFF in a profile will result in bypassing the registration of the measurement results from this profile in the current file in the buffer In the same time it will create more space in the buffer for the results from other profiles independent instruments 2 In 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis one selected result from each of three profiles together with the spectra can be logged in the current file of the buffer with the step selected in the BUF STEP position VI 400PRO USER MANUA EXAMPLE 3 To force the spectra to be logged every second in a file of the buffer without the results measured in three profiles the user has to set MEASURE SETUP sub list INT TIME lt any value gt REP CYCLE lt any value gt BUF STEP 1s BUFFERS SETUP sub list CHANNEL 1 BUFFERS None CHANNEL 2 BUFFERS None CHANNEL 3 BUFFERS None SPECTRUM BUFFER RMS FILE list SAVE OPTIONS AUTO SAVE VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 5 4 CALCULATION OF THE DOSE PARAMETERS AUX FUNCTIONS In order to open the AUX
242. s The results of this analysis are presented on the display after pressing lt ENTER gt in the case when the instrument is in the SPECTRUM display mode After this pressing the statistical analysis performed for the selected 1 3 OCTAVE filter is shown on the display The center frequency of the filter for which the analysis was made the LN number corresponding to the cursor position the LN value and the units are presented on the right side of the display The LN value can be changed by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The view of the displays in SPECTRUM mode and after entering the presentation of the statistical analysis results performed for each 1 3 OCTAVE filter The selection of 1 3 OCTAVE filter is performed after pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt The statistical analysis is also made for all TOTAL values of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis lt ESC gt has to be pressed in order to leave the presentation of the statistical analysis performed in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and return to the SPECTRUM display mode The view of the displays in the presentation of the statistical analysis results performed for TOTAL results of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis The spectra registered in the buffer s file can be presented on the display in the BUFFER VIEW sub list of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY BUFFER VIEW These spectra are saved with the same step as selected in the SLM profiles see the description of the BUF STEP position of the MEASURE SETUP sub list
243. s and sound analysis To return to the CALIBRATION sub list the user has to press lt ESC gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 1 2 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT Calibration BY MEASUREMENT for vibration signal The calibration BY MEASUREMENT can be conducted in the following way 1 Select BY MEASUREMENT from the CALIBRATION sub list and press lt ENTER gt 12 4 14 40 BY SEMSITIWITY CAL LEVEL YY MEASUREMENT A Be a The view of the displays with the selected calibration mode a and after entering this mode b 2 Attach the vibration calibrator to the instrument s accelerometer 3 Switch on the calibrator and wait a few seconds before starting the calibration measurement 4 Start the calibration measurement by pressing lt START STOP gt The calibration measurement starts after a 5 second delay countdown The measurement time is also predefined to 5 seconds During the calibration period lt ESC gt and lt PAUSE gt do not operate but it is possible to stop the measurement using lt START STOP gt Waiting for the calibration measurement to begin a DELAY is counted down and the text CALIBRATION changes The view of the displays while the instrument is waiting for the calibration measurement to commence During the calibration measurement the text changes to cal measure CAL MEASURE At the end of the measurement the result is displayed on the display in the bottom line gt 0 00 iP a 0 02 gt
244. s made with lt 4 gt lt gt After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the 1 1 OCTAVE SETUP sub list ignoring any changes is made after pressing lt ESC gt A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFER position The RMS or LEQ when the user selects A filter in FILTER position in SPECTRUM sub list result from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be saved in the buffer s file of the instrument The selection of the required result is made with lt 4 gt lt gt The selection of the None text means that the RMS or LEQ results are not saved in the buffer s file After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed returning to the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x sub list Pressing lt ESC gt ignores and changes made in the sub list and returns to the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP CHANNEL x sub list The view of the displays in the SPECTRUM sub list path MENU INPUT
245. s are given in Appendix D Three RMS detectors are available IMPULSE FAST and SLOW VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Each PROFILE x position allows for the independent selection of Weighting Filter and RMS Detector type When PROFILEx positon is high lighted press lt ENTER gt to access a sub list with FILTER and DETECT positions Use lt 4 gt lt gt gt in the FILTER position to select the option of LIN Linear A or C Use lt 4 gt lt gt gt in the DETECT position to select the option of IMP Impulse FAST or SLOW When both FILTER and DETECT positions have been set as desired press lt ENTER gt to accept or lt ESC gt to ignore the changes and return to the previous list 14 15 CH 3 PROFILE 1 FILTER 5 DETECT DEEN PROFILE 1 The view of the displays in the channel 3 sub list the selections PROFILE 1 FILTER C and DETECTOR FAST A Notice PROFILES 1 2 and 3 can each be set independently for Weighting Filter and RMS Detector settings on any CHANNEL x that has MODE programmed for SOUND Selection of the weighting filter in VLM FILTER The following weighting filters are available in any channel set for vibration meter mode of the instrument e for acceleration measurements HP1 HP3 HP10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm and Wh The view of the displays in the PROFILE 2 sub list the selection of the weighting filter for acceleration measurements VI 400PRO USER MANUAL e for velocity measureme
246. s for a list of available Remote Commands for the VI 400Pro The names of the filters introduced to the unit in above mentioned way as well as the values of the coefficients can be examined by means of the VIEW window from the VIBR FILTERS sub list of the SETUP list path MENU SETUP USER FILTERS VIBR FILTERS VIEW ID I2 The displays showing the possibility of the verification of the user filter names and the values of the coefficients taken to the calculation of the TOTAL values presented in the SPECTRUM mode The second TOTAL value is measured with the weighting filter e selected in the second channel CH or e specified as VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or e which name and coefficients are sent to the instrument using the serial interface a list of Remote Commands for this function is available from Quest Technologies 0 24 TOTAL_1 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 10 24 TOTAL 2 FE i FE FE CAL F C i C 8 AdE The view of the displays with the settings influencing the TOTAL values presented in the SPECTRUM mode in selected CHANNEL The third TOTAL value is measured with the weighting filter e selected in the third channel CH or e specified as VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or e which name and coefficients are sent to the instrument using the serial interface a list of Remote Commands for this function is available from Quest Technologies The view of the displays with the settings influencing the TOTAL values presented in t
247. s using the lt Alif gt and lt gt or lt gt and lt gt push buttons similarly as it has to be done in the SPECTRUM mode The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in the PLOT mode the registered results from CHANNEL 1 In the SPECTRUM mode it is possible to shift the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical axis of the presented results using lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Alif gt and lt gt After each pressing of these buttons the presented picture moves 10 dB down or up respectively The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the shifted horizontal axis in relation to vertical axis LOGarithmic units path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LOG the next one display is obtained from the previous one after TWO consecutive pressing of lt gt and lt Y gt The view of the displays in 1 3 OCTAVE analysis with the shifted horizontal axis in relation to vertical one LINear path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP CHANNEL x DISPLAY SCALE LIN METRIC path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS METRIC vibration units the next one display is obtained from the previous one after ONE pressing of lt gt and lt gt 4 74 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The spectra registered in the buffer s file can be presented on the display in the BUFFER VIEW sub list of the DISPLAY list These spectra are saved with the same step as selected in the VLM profiles see the description of t
248. s well as RMS result from the one selected channel 4 78 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL TRIGGER BU SOURCE CHAHHEL LEVEL 14 1 mis The view of the displays in TRIGGER SETUP window the selection of the signal used for triggering purposes in BUFFER mode METRIC units selected A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the range the measurement must be finished DP amp coll ee UFFERS j CHAHHEL 1 CHANNEL CHAHHEL 3 B CHANNEL 1 HAHHEL 2 CHANHEL 3 o CHAHHEL 4 The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the BUFFERS SETUP sub lists A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer and the level meter mode 4 79 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL VI 400PRO USER MANUA 5 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS 5 1 DATA AVAILABLE ON THE DISPLAY DISPLAY LIST In order to open the DISPLAY list the user has to e press lt Altf gt and lt MENU gt e select from the main list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt high light the DISPLAY text e press lt ENTER gt Pressing the lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Altf gt and l
249. sed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 pm to 100 pm VI 400PRO USER MANUAL SOUND e REFERENCE LEVEL for sound measurements is equal to 20 pPa VIBRATION UNITS sub list only relevant for vibration measurements VIBRATION UNITS position enables the user to set METRIC example m s m s m or NON METRIC units example g ips mil WARNINGS sub list RES NOT SAVE position enables the user to turn on or off the warning that the results of the measurement were not saved in memory available values V or VECTOR DEF sub list enables the user to select coefficients needed to calculate vibration vector taken into account during the calculation of the measurement results K1 K2 K3 K4 the coefficients set in the instrument these are used to calculate VECTO HAV WBV DOSE sub list enables the user to select parameters relevant the EXPOSURE and VIBRATION DOSE measurements MEASURE DOSE position enables the user to switch on ENABLED or switch off DISABLED the measurement of vibration dose EXPOSURE TIME position enables the user to set the exposure time of the vibration signal AXIS SETUP position enables the user to assign each axis of accelerometer to the channel number STANDARDS position enables the user to select the standard which determines the limits used for measured vibration Choices UNITED KINGDOM U K ITALY POLAND or USER are available in firmware version 2 17 of the VI 400Pr
250. selected by means of the RANGE position In order to change the display mode the user has to press lt gt or lt V gt The following modes are available One profile 3 PROFILES SPECTRUM STATISTICS and PLOT VI 400PRO USER MANUAL A Notice The user can select the number of the currently active display modes switching on V or off the given mode in the DISPLAY MODES sub list of the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES Only One profile mode cannot be switched off See Chapter 5 for the details about the display modes control One Profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS and PLOT display modes are identical as for the SLM The SPECTRUM mode displays 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results so called spectrum together with the TOTAL RMS values measured with A C and LIN weighting filters The read out of the interested spectrum value can be done by means of the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt lt gt gt On the right side of the display the selected 1 1 octave filter center frequency or the selected TOTAL is given the units and the weighting filter dB A dB C or dB in the case of the LIN and the numerical value are displayed The view of the displays in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis in the SPECTRUM display mode for CHANNEL 3 In One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes the results are presented in the same way as in the case of the SLM mode with only one difference that instead of the solid line a doted line is used The
251. selected file from the buffer containing spectra the change of the time histories of the filters and the filters after pressing lt Y gt After pressing lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt in time history the display presents the spectra corresponding to the previously seen view VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the change between time history and spectra after pressing lt ENTER gt for 500 Hz filter Additionally during the presentation of the results saved in the buffer the dynamic of the drawing can be changed The required value has to be set in the DYNAMIC position of the DISPLAY SCALE sub list of the DISPLAY list The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the time history of the MAX value from the third profile displayed with 80 dB 40 dB and 20 dB dynamic set in the DISPLAY SCALE Also in this case the different values of DYNAMIC it is possible to change the relation of the axis by pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Alif gt and lt 7 gt The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer the change of the axis relation The change of the axis relation for the time histories of the octave and third octave filters after pressing lt Altf gt and lt gt or lt Altf gt and lt V gt and the change of the dynamic of the presentation the DISPLAY SCALE sub list of the DISPLAY li
252. sition of the LN value displayed VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The acoustic measurement channel consists of the VI 400Pro the preamplifier part number 072 028 and the B amp K4936 microphone part number 059 523 The calibration of the sound measurement channels should be performed periodically The calibration procedure is described in Chapter 4 1 The vibration measurement channel consists of the VI 400Pro and an appropriate accelerometer This channel is factory calibrated and prepared for the work in the standard environmental conditions The calibration procedure is described in Chapter 4 1 The main functions of the VI 400Pro are the measurement of sound level using a microphone and preamp and the measurement of vibration level using an accelerometer 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and narrow band frequency analysis FFT can be selected for both sound level and vibration level measurements The detailed description of e the calibration procedure is given in Chapter 4 1 e the measurement of signal s level is described in Chapter 4 2 e 1 1 OCTAVE analysis is given in Chapter 4 4 e 1 3 OCTAVE analysis is described in Chapter 4 5 The additional functions of the instrument such as presenting measurement results DISPLAY list the setting parameters SETUP list and storing measurement results FILE list are described in Chapter 5 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 1 CALIBRATION The instrument is factory calibrated with the supplied acce
253. splay partial results for each file separately The results are displayed in two columns the first column for EAV results and the second for ELV results The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the PARTIAL EAV ELV text in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt Y gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt VI 400PRO USER MANUA F b RESULTS SEL t27 DAILY RESULTS The view of the display in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list the PARTIAL EAV ELV text highlighted B22 EAL L E BEBE GA Ga B2JUH1 8S oe BEBE BES HE B3JUM Be 1644 BABE Be Bso a The view of the display with the empty partial result list a the selecting file in RESULT SEL sub list b and the PARTIAL EAV ELYV results for selecting file b c The user can review the RESULTS SEL sub list and PARTIAL EAV ELV list using lt gt lt 7 gt The return to the WBV CALCULATOR sub list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt B 24 1 EAM ELU HEB BB e4o dye A ire one eben ASE 3 62JUH1 0S 48 HE BeBe 4 BAJUNH AA 164 The view of the display with the selecting file in RESULT SEL sub list and the PARTIAL EAV ELV results for selecting file Selection of the partial results PARTIAL RESULTS The PARTIAL RESULTS position path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR PARTIAL RESULTS is used to display PARTIAL
254. splays in TRIGGER SETUP window the selection of the signal used for triggering purposes in BUFFER mode A Notice It is not possible to change the values of the parameters during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not high lighted and therefore not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process th EA CHAHHEL 1 CHAHHEL 2 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 3 CHAHHWEL 4 The view of the displays with not accessible parameters of the BUFFERS SETUP sub lists A Notice All other settings of the instrument are common for 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer and the level meter mode 4 57 VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 4 5 1 3 OCTAVE ANALYZER In order to select the 1 3 OCTAVE analysis mode the user has to enter the FUNCTION list by pressing lt gt and lt MENU gt selecting FUNCTION text using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 1 gt lt gt and pressing lt ENTER gt Then the user has to open the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list to select the MEASUR FUNCTION text use lt 4 gt lt gt gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt push buttons and press lt ENTER gt when this text is high lighed 13 54 The view of the displays in the main list with the FUNCTION text selected a the FUNCTION list path MENU FUNCTION opened with the MEASUR FUNCTION text selected b 1 3 OCTAVE
255. st Selection of measurement parameters MEASURE SETUP Setting time delay before the start of measurements START DELAY Setting the integration time INT TIME Setting number of repetition of measurement cycles REP CYCLE Setting time between two writings to the buffer s file BUF STEP Setting parameters in channels and for octave analysis CHANNELS SETUP Setting parameters in a channel CHANNEL x Selection of the instruments mode MODE Selection of the measurement range RANGE 1 1 1 1 Selection of the microphone correction MIC Correction Selection of the channel profiles PROFILE x Selection of the weighting filter and RMS detection in SLM FILTER Selection of the weighting filter in VLM FILTER Selection of the RMS detector in VLM DETECTOR Selection of the measurement parameters BUFFERS SETUP Selection of the result to be saved in the buffer s file BUFFERS Selection of mode and triggering parameters TRIGGER SETUP Switching the triggering on and off TRIGGER Selection of the triggering signal in SLM SOURCE Setting the level of triggering LEVEL Setting the parameter related with the buffer triggering PRE POST TRIGGER 4 3 ACTIVATION OF OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 4 4 1 1 OCTAVE ANALYZER 4 4 1 1 1 OCTAVE analyzer of acoustic signal Selection of the measurement range in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis of acoustic signal RANGE Selection of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis result of acoustic signal to be saved in the
256. st Pressing lt ESC gt ignores the choice and returns to the previous list 4 I5 4 15 CH3 Hie CORRE CT CHS MIC CORRECT USE USE F DIFF DIFF nUTDOOR cs OUTDOOR The view of displays with all choices of DIFFUSE F OUTDOOR or no selection for MIC CORRECTION path MENU INPUT CHANNELS SETUP CHANNEL x MIC CORRECTION Selection of the channel profiles PROFILE x The PROFILE x sub lists appear in the CHANNEL x sub list only when the MODE has been programmed to SOUND There are three independent PROFILES 1 2 3 that can be programmed for each SOUND channel IH ie I le MODES Si MODECS 2 SOUND RANGE RANGE 13806 rite LURR EL T IGIN PROFILE 1 4 lH ile 4 Ie MODEC33 SOUND RANGE 13046 ft MIC CORRECTION t RANGE 1360E MIC CORRECTION PROFILE i HIC CORRECTION PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 1 JaeiPROFILE 2 JeRIPROFILE 3 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL x sub list when the SOUND mode is selected for channel 3 Selection of the Weighting Filter and RMS Detector in SLM FILTER The following weighting filters and RMS detectors are available for any of the three separate PROFILES for any channel set for sound level meter SLM mode e LIN conforms to the requirements for the Z filter of type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard e A type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards e C type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards The characteristics of the filter
257. st is also available Below the time history for 250 Hz filter is presented with the 80 dB 40 dB and 20 dB dynamic after changing the axis relation The view of the displays with the selected file from the buffer containing spectra the time histories for 250 Hz filter displayed with 80 dB 40 dB and 20 dB dynamic and with different relation of the axis The window is closed and the instrument returns to the BUFFER VIEW sub list after pressing lt ESC gt the required number of times this number depends on the displayed result Checking the state of the internal battery BATTERY The BATTERY path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY position enables the user to check the internal battery condition The current battery voltage is displayed together with its approximate state in graphical form The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt on the highlighted BATTERY text VI 400PRO USER MANUA rva 23 59 4 23 59 ra 23 59 ODES BATTERY 4 951 BATTERY 3 251 ALE Il pf ZEEE The view of the displays with the BATTERY position when the external power supply is not connected If the instrument is switched on when the external power supply is connected the special message is displayed in the BATTERY position 10 49 ETERNAL POWER 12 251 The view of the BATTERY path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY position when the external power supply is connected to the instrument The position is closed and the instrument returns to the D
258. status position informs the user that the set is switched on It is not possible to change the status J 14 EDIT The view of the display in the EDIT sub list setting the coefficients The selection of the position in the set is performed by means of lt gt lt V gt The value is introduced by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the USER FILTERS sub list after pressing lt ENTER gt confirmating all settings made in the sub list or lt ESC gt ignoring all settings made in the sub list Clearing the coefficients of the user filters CLEAR The CLEAR position enables the user to clear the values of the user coefficients of octave or third octave filters It is possible to clear all sets of coefficients ALL to clear the first set VUSR1 to clear the second set VUSR2 or to clear the third one VUSER3 in vibration measurements as well ALL SUSR1 SUSR2 and SUSR3 in sound measurements respectively The view of the displays in the USER FILTERS the CLEAR position selected The coefficients of a set or sets are cleared after the selection of the proper text by means of lt 4 gt lt gt and after pressing lt ENTER gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL 13 34 13 44 13 44 13 44 eee CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR a S ec LE The view of the displays in the CLEAR position in sound measurements 13 48 13 48 13 48 13 48 eels CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR i ee 2 i E j ec
259. stics savings SAVE STAT The SAVE STAT position is used to set the self saving of statistics measurements together with the sound measurement results The choices are to turn on V or trun off this option Together with the sound measurements 100 class statistics are performed the values named from L01 to L99 The statistics are not calculated for the vibration measurements The activation or deactivation of the SAVE STAT position is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt A Notice This position was created to save the memory of the instrument when the knowledge of the statistics is not necessary Each registration of the statistics requires 600 bytes of the memory RAM FILE E RAM FIL REPLACE REPLACE SAWE STAT SAVE STAT AUTO SAVE AUTO SAWE The displays during the execution of the SAVE OPTIONS the selection of the SAVE STAT parameters After pressing lt ENTER gt the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular the SAVE STAT position are confirmed and the sub list is closed Controlling of the measurement results savings AUTO SAVE Using the AUTO SAVE position one can set the self saving of the measurement results V or to switch off this possibility The activation or deactivation of the AUTO SAVE position is done by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt This position can be deactived in order not to waist too much memory when the self saving is not necessary E E RA
260. sult The EAV Total Time result is calculated according to the formula 2 EAV T LAVA RMS ws 4 EAV T FAVv VDV s EAV if EAV limit is in EAV s EAV 1 if EAV limit isin a The EAV Time Left Result The EAV Time Left result is calculated according to the formula EAV EAV T The ELV Total Time result The ELV Total Time result is calculated according to the formula 2 ELV T iva RMS ws 4 ELV T ELV VDV we ELV if ELV limitis in ELV ELV if ELV limit is in 2 at The ELV Time Left Result The ELV Time Left result is calculated according to the formula ELV ELV T VI 400Pro USER MANUAL D 1 4 Definitions of the results available in the sound mode of the VI 400Pro The PEAK result The PEAK result Peak Sound Pressure or Peak Sound Level is calculated for the given T from the formula PEAK 20log max a w t po For the PEAK result saved in the files of the buffer time history T Tp The SPL result The SPL result Sound Pressure Level gives an equivalent of the Sound Level Meter according to the IEC 651 Standard meeting the requirements for the Type 1 instrument The value of the SPL result is calculated from the formula SPL 20log max py t p where Ti the last second of the measurement The MAX result The MAX result means the maximal value on the detector output for the integration time period The MAX result for the time
261. surements and gt LOG logarithmic for sound measurements DYNAMIC position available values for the dynamics of graphical modes of presenting results 80dB 40dB 20dB 10dB X ZOOM position the multiplier for the horizontal axis for the graphical modes of presenting results 1x e TOTAL VALUES 0 TOTAL 1 sub list the weighted filter to be used for the calculation of the TOTAL value in the first profile gt FILTER position available values of the weighted filters e for sound measurements A SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other sent to the unit via the interface e for vibration measurements HP VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other sent to the unit via the interface gt TYPE position available only for vibration measurements available values if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position ACC VEL and DIL if the HP filter was selected this position is not displayed gt CAL F position available only for vibration measurements accessible if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position if the HP filter was selected in the 1 channel this position is not displayed available values from 60 0dB to 60 0dB with 0 1dB or 1 dB step TOTAL 2 sub list the weighted filter to be used for the calculation of the TOTAL value in the second profile gt FILTER position available values of the weighted filters e for sound measurements C SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other sent to the unit via the in
262. t enables the user to enter the main list containing six sub lists FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE AUX FUNCTIONS and SETUP Each of the mentioned above sub lists consists of the sub lists elements and data windows These main sub VI 400PRO USER MANUAL lists will be described in detail in the following chapters of the manual Double pressing the lt MENU gt push button enters a list containing the four last opened sub lists This often speeds up the control of the instrument lt ESC gt This push button closes the control lists sub lists or windows It acts in opposite to the lt ENTER gt push button When a window is closed by pressing the lt ESC gt push button in almost all cases any changes made will be ignored lt gt This push button pressed in conjunction with lt gt enables the user to switch on or off the backlight of the display screen lt lt gt lt gt gt These push buttons navigate left or right and enable the user to e select the options in an active position in the horizontal direction e g filter LIN A or C Integration time 1s 2s 3s etc e select the measurement result to be displayed e g PEAK MAX MIN etc in One Profile and 3 PROFILES modes of result s presentation e control the cursor in SPECTRUM PLOT and STATISTICS modes of result s presentation e select the position of the character in the text edition i e in the FILE NAME menu lt
263. t In the case of acoustic signals the SOUND METER option should be selected by pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt to change to SOUND and press lt ENTER gt which closes the MODE sub list The MODE sub list is closed ignoring any changes made in it after pressing lt ESC gt a The view of the displays in the CHANNEL x path MENU INPUT list with the CHANNEL x text selected a the VIBR METER mode selected b and the SOUND METER mode selected c The instrument s operation as 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer is similar to the SLM measurement mode 1 In 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the spectrum is available in parallel to the SLM operation All 45 digital pass band filters with the center frequencies from 20 kHz down to 0 8 Hz in base two system are working in the real time with the weighting filters HP LIN A or C selected in the SPECTRUM of the 1 3 OCTAVE SETUP sub list the user has to select the number of CHANNEL to configure the filter and the linear RMS detector Additionally the TOTAL RMS values for the full frequency range with the A C and LIN Z weightings are displayed In order to inform the user about the working mode of the instrument in One profile and 3 PROFILES display modes doted lines are used for the indication that the instrument is not in the SLM mode In the SLM mode solid lines are used 32 SPL 46 106 Al GR 646 80 A The view of the displays in One profile and 3 PROFILES display mode with the doted lines indicating th
264. t 4 gt results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt Altf gt and lt 7 gt or lt Alif gt and lt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list The view of the display in the main list the DISPLAY text high lighted The DISPLAY list is used for setting the various parameters which are mainly dedicated for the control of the display The following items are present on this list DISPLAY MODES enables one to select the display mode the way measurement results are presented DISPLAY SETUP enables one to change the scale in the graphical display modes select the results presented as Total values choose the type of the presented spectrum for each channel separately BUFFER VIEW enables one to view at the results stored in the files of the buffer BATTERY enables one to check the state of the internal battery of the unit CONTRAST enables one to set the contrast of the unit s display BACKLIGHT enables one to set the brightness of the backlight of the display and the keyboard UNIT LABEL informs the user about the serial number of the unit the version of the internal firmware and the standards to which the measurement results conform In each available position any change is performed by means of lt 4 gt lt gt gt In order to confirm the selection the lt ENTER gt push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In
265. t of the absolute voltage higher than 15 V If necessary higher voltage can be used even up to 30 V but in that case a serial resistor from 5 kOhm to 10 kOhm should be connected with the source of trigger signal b Triggering level 1 V c Triggering slope uprising d Minimal duration of the triggering signal 100 msec it means that the input signal higher than 1 V threshold has to be kept for at least 100 msec e Input impedance ca 10 kOhm 100pF ESD type safety 3 2 The SLAVE input signal cf point 2 the instrument receives the voltage impulse having the parameters given below a Voltage range level impedance as in 3 1 it is not recommended to use the voltage higher than 12 V 1 V additional serial resistances are not recommended either b Minimal duration of the triggering impulse 10 seconds c The triggering is done on the slope falling or rising of the triggering signal set by the user by passing through 1 V threshold d Next triggering is possible after 100 usec from the end of the previous measurement Vl 400Pro User Manual 3 3 The MASTER output signal cf point 3 for trigger control the instrument operates as a trigger signal source output impulse with the parameters given below a Voltage O V or 3 V b Triggering slope uprising or falling down set by the user in the menu c Input impedance 50 Ohm d Duration of the impulse ca 10 usec Interface USB 1 1 It meets
266. t one has to press lt ENTER gt on the high lighted DISPLAY SCALE text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The DISPLAY SCALE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing lt ESC gt which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or lt ENTER gt which confirms the changes Iz g g DISPLAY M DES j e Ea i an e C a CHAHHEL 3 SPECTRUM TYPE OY CHAHHEL 4 BATTER The view of the display with the DISPLAY list the DISPLAY SCALE text highlighted This position can be active only in the case of vibration measurements when in the MODE sub list the VIBR METER is selected Two options are available LIN linear and LOG logarithmic In the case of linear the graphical presentation and the units both are linear In the case of logarithmic the graphical presentation is given in the logarithmic scale and the measurement results are expressed in decibels the result is related to the values set in the REFERENCE LEVEL It is possible to set the required option using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The confirmation of the selection is made by pressing lt ENTER gt The return ignoring any change is made after pressing lt ESC gt 2 42 12 44 LAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE E i DYHAMIC r00M The view of the displays with the possible options of the VIBRATION SCALE 1x Scaling of the vertical axis of the graphical presentation DYNAMIC For the vertical axis the user can obtain the
267. t process e In Inverse mode pressing lt gt in conjunction with the lt START STOP gt push button will start or stop the measurement process A Notice The operation of the lt START STOP gt push button mode can be set as Normal or Inverse in the SHIFT MODE window of the SETUP list see Chapter 5 for the SETUP list description A Notice The Shift or 2 Fun operation mode of the lt gt push button is independent of the Normal or Inverse mode setting of the lt START STOP gt push button lt PAUSE gt This push button enables one to temporarily cease the measurement process The last one second measurement result is deleted after the subsequent pressing of the lt PAUSE gt push button Up to fifteen last seconds of the measurement can be cancelled in this way lt gt This push button pressed in conjunction with the lt gt enables the user to continue the measurement process that was ceased temporarily by pressing the lt PAUSE gt push button A Notice The simultaneous pressing of the lt PAUSE gt and lt START STOP gt push buttons switches the instrument on and off lt ENTER gt This push button enables one to enter the selected operation mode or to confirm control options Some additional functions of this push button will be described in the following chapters lt gt This push button pressed in conjunction with lt g
268. t the user has to press lt ESC gt AAW CALL te The view of the displays with the HAV CALCULATOR list Selection of the calculation results HAV CALCULATOR The HAV CALCULATOR path MENU AUX FUNCTIONS HAV WBV CALC HAV CALCULATOR position is used to calculate the various H A parameters which are mainly dedicated for the control of the vibration dose There values calculated are the PARTIAL EAV ELV PARTIAL EXPOSURE and DAILY EXPOSURE of vibration All results are counted according to the standard selected in the STANDARD position path SETUP HAV WBV DOSE STANDARDS n order to enter this sub list the user has to select highlight the HAV CALCULATOR text in the HAV WBV CALC list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt and press lt ENTER gt The selection of a parameter which level has to be set is done using lt gt lt 7 gt This function is available only in VLM mode VI 400PRO USER MANUA In the HAV CALCULATOR list the following items are available RESULTS SEL position which enables the user to select files with measurement s results with H A data PARTIAL EAV ELV position which displays the partial result of dose PARTIAL EXP position which displays the result of exposure DAILY EXPOSURE position which displays the result of daily exposure The user can select available positions from the main list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt the display text is highl
269. ta file from the FLASH DISC for example for verification or comparison The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the LOAD text in the FILE list is highlighted selected using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt SALUE SAUE OPTIONS The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the LOAD text highlighted A Notice It is not possible to load the file during the execution of the measurements On such attempt the message measurement in progress MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS is displayed for about 2 seconds After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the file loading is not possible In such case the message with the changing case letters is displayed see below and the instrument returns after a few seconds to the list from which the LOAD position was called VI 400PRO USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT measurement IH FROGRESS in Progress The view of the displays with the message stating the reason the requested operation is not possible When the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the LOAD position the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction from the user The user should then press the lt ESC gt lt ENTER gt or lt START STOP gt push button 13 17 13 17 HO FILES LOA
270. taneous channel results is performed by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt 7 gt The selection of the statistical level number occurs by pressing lt gt with lt 4 gt or lt gt with lt P gt VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The view of the displays in one profile mode switching among the channels 3 PROFILES mode of measurement results presentation In 3 PROFILES mode of results presentation the selected results from each channel are displayed in three consecutive lines In each line the channel number the name of the measurement result its value the weighting filter and the detector time constant are presented The channels are separated by two solid horizontal lines These lines are doted in modes other than sound level meter 12 15 lilts F1 3dB Agy2 Leo 24 006 C 24 506 C 3 Mas 66 006 CARR 36 306 The view of the displays in 3 PROFILES presentation switching among the channels 12 15 PAB Oi Sd A 2 LEtl 24 006 Ci z2 LEH J MAK 66 906 The display shows three lines with the active channel highlighted The change of the active highlighted channel is performed by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt 7 gt Switching among the simultaneously calculated results in the active channel is performed by pressing lt 4 gt or lt gt gt Presentation of the statistical analysis results STATISTICS In the STATISTICS presentation all LN from N 1 up to N 99 val
271. terface e for vibration measurements CH VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other sent to the unit via the interface gt TYPE position available only for vibration measurements available values if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position ACC VEL and DIL if the CH filter was selected in the 2 channel this position is not displayed gt CAL F position available only for vibration measurements accessible if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position if the CH filter was selected in the 2 channel this position is not displayed available values from 60 0dB to 60 0dB with 0 1dB or 1 dB step TOTAL 3 sub list the weighted filter to be used for the calculation of the TOTAL value in the third profile VV WV VI 400PRO USER MANUAL gt FILTER position available values of the weighted filters e for sound measurements LIN SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other sent to the unit via the interface e for vibration measurements CH VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other sent to the unit via the interface gt TYPE position available only for vibration measurements available values if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position ACC VEL and DIL if the CH filter was selected in the 3 channel this position is not displayed gt CAL F position available only for vibration measurements accessible if VUSR1 VUSR2 or VUSR3 was selected in the FILTER position if the CH filter was selected in the
272. text in the SETUP list using lt gt lt V gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt The selection of a parameter which level has to be set is done by means of lt gt lt 7 gt 4 02 14 09 CLEAR SETUP RMS IHTEGRATIOH 4 The view of the display in the SETUP list the REFERENCE LEVEL text highlighted displayed inversely Setting the reference level of the acceleration signal ACC In the ACC position the user can set the reference level of the acceleration signal It is possible to set this level from 1 ums to 100 ums with 1 ums steps pressing lt 4 gt lt gt The steps can be increased in 10 ums increments pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored ae FEHCE LEVELS pr z 1 pr The display s view in the REFERENCE LEVEL sub list the reference level setting of acceleration signal Setting the reference level of the velocity signal VEL In the VEL position the user can set the reference level of the velocity signal It is possible to set this level from 1 nms to 100 nms with 1 nms steps pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt The steps can be increased in 10 nms increments pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has t
273. th the message if the REPLACE position path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS is not active b VI 400PRO USER MANUA Controlling the data storing in the instrument s memory SAVE OPTIONS The SAVE OPTIONS path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS sub list is used for the selection of the options of storing data in the FLASH DISC memory of the instrument The sub list is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt ie the SAVE OPTIONS text in the FILE list is highlighted selected using the lt gt lt gt or lt lt gt lt gt gt The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt SAWE DELETE The view of the displays in the FILE sub list with the SAVE OPTIONS text highlighted It is possible to replace an existing file with a new file with the same name the REPLACE position to include the statistics of the measurements with the results the SAVE STAT position valid only for sound measurements and to automatically save the results of the measurements the AUTO SAVE position The position of the sub list is changed after pressing lt gt lt 7 gt In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed Such pressing also closes the opened sub list Saving of the files to the RAM memory RAM FILE The RAM FILE position enables the user to save the results of the measurement in the special file at RAM memory the name of the file is defined as a RAMfile The activation or deactivation of the RAM
274. ther e EDIT e EDIT enables the user to select which filters should be edited the available options are VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other transmitted to the instrument via computer interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of the filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the user can set the values of correcting coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters gt 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB gt gt is gt 20 0kHz available values of 20 kHz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB e CLEAR position 0 CLEAR enables the user to select which filters should be cleared the available options are ALL VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other SOUND FILTERS e VIEW 0 VIEW enables the user to select which filter should be viewed the available options are SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 and any other transmitted to the instrument via computer interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and saved under the name USER1 USER2 USER3 or any other e EDIT 0 EDIT enables the user to select which filters should be edited the available options are SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other transmitted to the instrument via computer interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of the filters used in 1 1 OC
275. this sub list is not available for Sound Level Measurement SLM or Vibration Level Measurement VLM choices it appears only for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analyzer choices e FILTER position available digital weighting filter used during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis for sound measurements HP LIN A C e BUFFER position available types of measurement results which will be saved in the instrument s buffer during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis o None RMS for vibration measurements o None RMS LEQ for sound measurements gt TRIGGER SETUP sub list TRIGGER position available values Off SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL BUFFER SOURCE position the source of the triggering signal SOURCE position the source of the triggering signal 0 0 VECT RMS 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 16kHz for vibration measurements with BUFFER selected in the TRIGGER position and 1 1 OCTAVE function VECTRMS 125Hz 160Hz 200Hz 20kHz for vibration measurements with BUFFER selected in the TRIGGER position and 1 3 OCTAVE function VECTRMS for vibration measurements and VLM or FFT function VEC SND MAX 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 16kHz for sound measurements with BUFFER selected in the TRIGGER position and 1 1 OCTAVE function VEC SNDMAX 125Hz 160Hz 200Hz 20kKHz for sound measurements with BUFFER selected in the TRIGGER position and 1 3 OCTAVE function LEVEL position available values of
276. time is equal to 1 second It protects the instrument from the registration of readings effected by pressing the push button In the CALIBRATION mode the delay time is equal to 5 seconds 9 E 9 24 9 24 START TRE EE START DELAY MEE hee LEER ELA IHT TIME IHT TIHE IHT REF CYCLE Inf REF CYCLE ae REP LATE Mie BUF STEP BUF STEP BUF STEP The view of the displays with the MEASURE SETUP sub list opened path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP the setting of the START DELAY VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Setting the integration time INT TIME The INT TIME position defines the time period in which the signal is being averaged during sound level measurements INT TIME can be set from 1 to 59 seconds in 1 second steps from 1 to 59 minutes in 1 minute steps from 1 to 24 hours in 1 hour steps or to predefined periods of 1m 5m 15m th 8h and 24h The INT TIME can be incremented in units by pressing lt gt or lt gt The INT TIME can be incremented in tens by pressing lt Alt f gt with lt gt gt or lt Alt f gt with lt gt gt from 1 s to 59 s with 1 second or 10 second steps oa START DELAY 2s START THE 2s IHT TIME IHT TIME REP CYCLE REP CYCLE BUF STEP 15 BUF STEP The view of the displays setting the INT TIME path MENU INPUT MEASURE SETUP time expressed in seconds 9 78 START DELAY 2s IHT TIME REP CYCLE BUF STEP 1s H ls r fr
277. ton must be pressed and released This mode is additionally signalled by the flashing 2n dF text placed instead of the Clock icon This flashing starts after pressing the lt Altf gt and lasts till pressing any other push button In order to select a desired mode of the lt Altf gt push button lt 4 gt lt gt should be pressed In order to confirm the selection and close the sub list press lt ENTER gt Pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored The view of the displays in the SHIFT MODE sub list the available settings in the SHIFT position VI 400PRO USER MANUA Selection of the working mode of lt START STOP gt push button ST SP In the ST SP path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE position the user can choose between Normal and Inverse When the Normal text is selected the lt START STOP gt push button operates as it is described in Chapter 2 the instrument reacts on each of its pressing starting or stopping the measurements When the Inverse text is selected the lt START STOP gt push button operates in conjunction or in a sequence with the lt Altf gt push button The measurements are started or stopped after pressing both push buttons In order to select a desired mode of the lt START STOP gt push button lt 4 gt lt gt should be pressed In order to confirm the selection lt ENTER gt has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing
278. tored for each channel appears in parenthesis to the right og the channel number in the CHANNEL x The selection of the parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list is made by pressing the lt gt lt Y gt push buttons After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed The return to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button VI 400PRO USER MANUAL RMS y The view of the displays in the CHANNEL x sub list the selection of the parameters to be saved in the buffer s file for vibration mode a and sound mode b In order to switch parameters in the buffer the user has to place special character in the chosen position available values are V or The selection of the required buffers parameter is made with the lt 4 gt lt gt push buttons The user can pass to the selection of the next parameter from the CHANNEL x sub list pressing the lt gt lt Y gt push buttons After pressing lt ENTER gt any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and the sub list is closed After pressing lt ESC gt any changes made in the sub list are ignored and the sub list is closed When the sub list is closed the display returns to the BUFFERS SETUP sub list 3 25 ES AE ae sie ea PEAK aena 45 PROF MAX w CHANNEL 3 4 1 RMS v 4 The view of the displays in the CHANNEL 1 sub l
279. ues for the selected channel are presented The read out of the desired LN value is done using the cursor controlled by lt 4 gt or lt gt gt In this STATISTICS display mode the selected channel s number the statistics class its value and units are given on the right side of the display The view of the displays in STATISTICS mode changing the cursor position in an active channel In this STATISTICS mode the active channel can be changed by pressing lt gt with lt gt or lt gt with lt gt The position of the cursor remains in the same position with the change of the channels The view of the displays in STATISTICS mode changing the active channel VI 400PRO USER MANUAL Presentation of time history PLOT The PLOT mode for displaying results is available if data from at least one channel are logged in the buffer s file In the BUFFERS SETUP sub list of the INPUT list if the BUFFERS position is switched ON but the selected channel has nothing switched on V the NO RESULTS text is displayed when first entering this PLOT mode see Figure below When the BUFFERS positon is selected as non active BUFFER OFF and it is set for all channels the PLOT mode screen of displayed results is skipped all together HO RESULTS The view of the display in the PLOT mode when there is nothing in the buffer to be displayed after setting PLOT as active The results are presented in the PLOT display when the BUFFERS
280. ult The Maximum Transient Vibration Value MTVV saved as the main result is defined according to the ISO 8041 standard as MTVV max p t fort 1sec The RMS result The RMS result is calculated according to the formula RMS ry t dt T 0 For the RMS result saved in the files of the buffer time history T Tp The VDV result The fourth power vibration dose value VDV expressed in meters per second taken to the power of 1 75 m s is calculated from the formula T Mn VDV fe Oat This result is calculated in the case when the Human Vibration Option is available The VEC result The vector result is calculated from the formula 4 VEC K RMS i 1 where K coefficient for channel i For channels not selected for vector calculation K equals to zero RMS the RMS value from channel i Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL D 1 2 Definitions of the Hand Arm vibration results available in the vibration mode of the VI 400Pro Symbol definitions AEQ RMS RMS RMS To Reference duration of 28 800 seconds 8 hours Te Exposure time T Measurement time EAV Exposure Action Value ELV Exposure Limit Value The Current Exposure result The Current Exposure result is calculated according to the formula CExp AEQ T To The Daily Exposure result The Daily Exposure result is calculated according to the formula A 8 AEQ Je T The EAV Total Time result The EAV Total Time res
281. ult is calculated according to the formula EAV EAV T FX The EAV Time Left Result The EAV Time Left result is calculated according to the formula EAV EAV T The ELV Total Time result The ELV Total Time result is calculated according to the formula ELV ELV T EE The ELV Time Left Result The ELV Time Left result is calculated according to the formula ELV ELV T VI 400Pro USER MANUAL D 1 3 Definitions of the Whole Body vibration results available in the vibration mode of the VI 400Pro Symbol definitions VDVwe max 1 4VDV 1 4VDV VDV RMS we max 1 4RMS 1 4RMS RMS To Reference duration of 28 800 seconds 8 hours Te Exposure time T Measurement time m EAV Exposure Action Value expressed in S ELV Exposure Limit Value expressed in s EAV Exposure Action Value expressed in st ELV Exposure Limit Value expressed in s The Current Exposure result The Current Exposure result is calculated according to the formula T CExp RMS w T The Daily Exposure result The Daily Exposure result is calculated according to the formula Te A 8 RMS s To The Current Dose result The Current Dose result is calculated according to the formula CDose VDV wes The Daily Dose result The Daily Dose result is calculated according to the formula DDose VDV ws 4 E Vi 400Pro USER MANUAL The EAV Total Time re
282. ure time of the vibration signal It is possible to set the maximum to 24 hours in 1 m steps pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt or in 30 m steps pressing lt Alif gt with lt 4 gt lt gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has to be pressed which closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored I4 14 13 14 ld ESPOSURE TIME ExPOSURE TIME ExSPOSURE TIME LS gL a 5 The view of the displays during the setting of the EXPOSURE TIME path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE EXPOSURE TIME exposure time expressed in hours and minutes VI 400PRO USER MANUA I 1b Ex POSURE TIME The view of the display with maximum EXPOSURE TIME A Notice It is possible to change the time during the execution of the measurements Selection of the parameters of vibration dose AXIS SETUP In the AXIS SETUP position path MENU SETUP HAV WBV DOSE AXIS SETUP the user can assign each axis of a triaxial accelerometer a channel number It could also be three different single axis accelerometers assigned a channel number It is possible to set this channel using lt 4 gt lt gt gt The user can change position using lt gt lt 7 gt In order to confirm the setting lt ENTER gt has to be pressed which closes the sub list After pressing lt ESC gt the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored The view of th
283. urements It is possible to select at most 6 files which include measurement s results with WBV data The position is opened after pressing lt ENTER gt when the RESULTS SEL text in the WBV CALCULATOR list is selected highlighted using lt gt lt gt or lt lt gt lt gt The return to the AUX FUNCTIONS list is possible after pressing lt ESC gt 1 46 E PARTIAL RESULTS DAILY RESULTS The view of the display in the WBV CALCULATOR sub list the RESULT SEL text highlighted After pressing lt ENTER gt the position is closed and the instrument opens a new sub list consisting of six positions The user can review the list using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and select the position after pressing lt ENTER gt EMPTY EMPTY The view of the display in the RESULTS SEL list MLN 1 Du e 4 In order to enter the file the user has to select highlight a position using lt gt lt 7 gt or lt 4 gt lt gt gt and press lt ENTER gt FILE HANE Bsh44m VI 400PRO USER MANUAL The current file is displayed in the first line The name of the file is highlighted in the second line The change of the current file with the unit step is done pressing lt 4 gt lt gt gt After pressing lt Altf gt with lt 4 gt the first file is available and after pressing lt Altf gt with lt gt gt the last file is displayed The name of the file is
284. which filters should be edited the available options are as follows VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other transmitted t o the instrument from a PC by means of the USB interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of the filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the user can set the values of correcting coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz center frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB 1 00 Hz available values of 1Hz center frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB K9 KO K9 20 0kHz available values of 20 kHz center frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB CLEAR position CLEAR enables the user to select which filters should be cleared the available options are as follows ALL VUSR1 VUSR2 VUSR3 or any other gt SOUND FILTERS VIEW o VIEW enables the user to select which filter should be viewed the available options are SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 and any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the USB interface After pressing lt ENTER gt another sub list opens containing the values of filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and saved under the name SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other EDIT o EDIT enables the user to select which filters should be edited the available options are as follows SUSR1 SUSR2 SUSR3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the USB interface After p

VI400 Vibration Monitor User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents